Home

Fagor CNC8070 User's Manual

1.
2. SELECT PROBE 2 Selects the second probe Geometrical configuration of the axes plane or trihedron At the lathe model the geometrical configuration of the axes may be either of the plane or trinedron type depending on the availability of a third main axis usually the Y axis The different calibration modes adapt to the current configuration showing the necessary data for each one of them x Geometrical configuration of trihedron type axes It is the typical configuration of a milling machine or of a lathe that has a third main axis Y axis Z There are three axes forming a Cartesian XYZ type trihedron like on a milling machine There may be more axes besides those forming the trihedron Y With this configuration the planes behave in the same way as on a milling machine except that the usual work plane will be G18 if it has been configured like that x Geometrical configuration of plane type axes It is the typical configuration of a lathe There are two axes forming the usual work plane There may be more axes but they cannot be part of the trihedron there must be auxiliary rotary etc With this configuration the active plane will be formed by the first two axes defined in the channel Ifthe X first and Z second axes have been defined the work plane will be the ZX Z as abscissa and X as ordinate The work plane is always G18 the plane cannot be changed via part program Co
3. ccceccceeeceee cee ceeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeaaeeeseaaeseseaeeetaeeenee 152 7 1 1 Window description ia 7 2 Standard MDI WindOW iisas iriiria piiniat sainia aise ane 154 7 2 1 Block editing ANd exXeCUt ON sisisi esisiini nasin raia iadaa Eaa 155 7 3 Full MDI SGrOEM sisien ari cacaevescenastinvicaacdeven insadsananertinevensest 156 7 3 1 BIOCK CXCCUUION csccisccisscssecseccsccicesccencaccraassacazcavccssoccassttaaicessedeseseatszsecdsedisaccensads 158 7 3 2 Save the blocks as a PrOGraM 0 eeeceeceeeeceeeee eee ee eeceeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeseeaeeeseeeeeteeaeeetae 159 USER TABLES 8 1 Appearance of the table MOdE ccccecseeeeeneceeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeseaeeeeaeeeeeeaaeeenaaeeeenaeetes 162 8 1 1 Icon description vertical SOftKCYS ceeceeceeeceeceeeeeeceeeeceeeeeeeaeeeseeaeeeseaeeeteaes 163 8 2 Zero OSE taD Sna aa idea sneeedd adda 165 8 3 Fixture table 166 8 4 Arithmetic parameter tables cece eee ceeeeeeeeeeeeteneeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeaeeeaeee 167 8 5 Operations with tables 168 8 5 1 Bieke lita e AIEA T AT T ATE Ta TT 168 8 5 2 Save and recall tablo Seritsa eaveea dence eee hei teeta dens 169 8 5 3 eilals lat cipeeerpreper tree ereerrer creer ce pecterere rec tpettrerecerrerrer tect EN ETNE 170 TOOL AND MAGAZINE TABLE 9 1 Showing tables and Common oOperatiONnS cccceceeeeeeeeeeeeenteeeeeceeeseeeeeteeaeeetee 172 9 1 1 Table selection 0 9 1 2 Search for a text in the tables ax 9 1 3 Save and load
4. Wit this option several channels may be overlapped When this option is selected the softkey color changes to red O Softkey AUTOSCALE When autoscaling a channel the system determines the proper vertical scale and offset so the signal appears as enlarged as possible inside its graphic area O Softkey FREEZE SCREEN The display is frozen without interrupting the data capture When this option is selected the softkey shows Resume This softkey only appears on the horizontal softkey menu if the capture is in continuous mode To set the capture in continuous mode change the mode option of the configuration screen O Softkey BEGIN CAPTURE Start taking data to show it graphically When this option is selected the softkey shows Stop 44 b gt rid Vertical softkey menu Depending on which data has the focus the vertical softkeys show different options Focus on a variable of a channel When the focus is on any of the variables the vertical softkeys will be The scale of the graphic may be changed with the scale softkeys The new scale value will appear on the graphic next to the corresponding variable The graphics of the desired channel may be moved up and down using the offset softkeys This softkey may also be used to center the graphics E E EE
5. eae When the focus is on any of the variables a new variable name may be either keyed in or selected without having to go to CONFIG Focus on the WIN field With win it shows the oscilloscope window where it is When the focus is on this field the vertical softkeys will be It takes the window to the beginning It takes the window to the end It takes the window to the trigger If there is no trigger it will go to the center of the window Moves the window to the left Moves the window to the right Focus on the T Div field When the focus is on the T Div field the following softkeys will appear Using the autoscale softkey the oscilloscope selects the right time scale so the signal appears as large as possible inside its corresponding graphic area It increases or decreases the time scale a Oscilloscope SETUP ASSISTANCE FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 273 SETUP ASSISTANCE GO Oscilloscope FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 274 V 44 b gt did Focus on the C1 or C2 field Cursors C1 and C2 may be used to analyze each signal of the last data capture These two cursors may be used to obtain the position in milliseconds of each signal and the time difference between them A When the focus is on one of the fields C1 or C2 the following vertical softkeys will appear Takes the cursor to the beginning Takes the cursor to the end Ta
6. 234 11 9 1 Editing logic analyzer data In order to capture trace data the user must enter the variables or expressions to be analyzed the trigger type and conditions as well as the time based to be used to display the captured values To edit this data select the graphic area of the logic analyzer and press the Edit view softkey to place the cursor on the data editing area Keys for defining the data of the logic analyzer 1 1 To move the cursor through the data m Q k To move the cursor whitin a data g o To display the drop list menus y oO ENTER To validate the defined data X oO ESC To quit cancels editing data S D O Definition of variables Up to 8 PLC variables or expressions may be defined to obtain their trace The definition of the expression cannot exceed 80 characters When modifying a variable if there was already a trace of that expression the trace will be deleted when validating the new edition Trigger condition A trigger condition is the one used to capture data and may be defined with a PLC variable or expression The definition of the expression cannot exceed 80 characters If the trigger condition is modified after a data capture all the traces will be deleted when validating the new condition Trigger type It sets whether the data is to be captured before after or before and after the selected trigger condition is met By default The data capture star
7. PRG Change of criteria when assuming a new master spindle in the channel PRG Selecting the loop for an axis or a spindle SERVO ON OFF PRG Spindle synchronization SYNC TSYNC UNSYNC PRG Canned cycle selection MILLCY LATHECY PRG New variables Variable to read the accumulated PLC offset Variable to obtain a linear estimation of the following error Variables to read the instant value of feed forward or AC forward Variable to know the line number of the file being executed Variable to know what kind of cycle is active Variable to know the tool orientation Variable to know whether the HSC mode is active or not Variable to know the theoretical feedrate on 3D path Variable to know the number of the warning being displayed The variable V G CNCERR is now per channel INST PRG Improved tool table DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY Manufacturer We declare Safety EN 60204 1 Fagor Automation S Coop Barrio de San Andr s 19 C P 20500 Mondrag n Guipuzcoa SPAIN under our responsibility that the product Fagor CNC8070 Numerical Control meets the following directives Machine safety Electrical equipment of the machines Electromagnetic compatibility EN 50081 2 EN 55011 EN 55011 EN 61000 3 2 EN 61000 3 3 EN 50082 2 EN 61000 4 2 EN 61000 4 4 EN 61000 4 5 EN 61000 4 11 EN 61000 4 3 EN 61000 4 6 Emission Radiated Class A Group 1 Con
8. Sort V03 0x 47 AUTOMATIC MODE Graphic screen FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 48 Softkey menus of the graphics window When selecting the graphic window the horizontal softkey menu shows the options associated with that window The set of options offered by this menu may be changed using the softkey which offers a new set of options The options available in the softkey menu are the following See 3 5 Graphic screen softkeys on page 49 O Type of graphics To select the type of graphics O ZOOM To enlarge or reduce the whole graph shown or part of it O Dimensions To define the size of the graphic representation O Point of view To change the point of view of the graph and show it from another perspective O Measurement To measure the distance between two points O Clear screen It is used to clear the screen or delete the graphics displayed O Colors To set the appearance of the graphics on display O Options To set the appearance and some options of the graphic window O Real To display either the real or the theoretical tool path 3 5 Graphic screen softkeys 3 5 1 Type of graphics To select the type of graphics The various types of graphics may be line 8D lines XY XZ YZ and Combined or solid Sections and 3D solid Line graphics show the tool path with lines of different colors and solid graphics show an image of the part being executed The type of graphics selected wi
9. Circularity roundness FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 285 13 3 1 Interface description The screen of the circularity test looks like this with two clearly different parts A graphics window that shows the result of the test and a data area for interacting with the system SETUP ASSISTANCE GO The circularity roundness test v The graphics window It is the area that shows graphically the result of the test The graphic shows the two moving axes and the theoretical circle of the interpolation that will be carried out As the test is being run the positioning error at each point is drawn on the circle This error is shown projected radially Superimposed on the graphics it shows the following additional data that is updated by the CNC e The real coordinates of the axes e Programmed feedrate and applied e Diameter of the displayed circle e Maximum and minimum error over the theoretical radius and angular position where it has been detected FAGOR CNC 8070 SoFT V03 0x 286 h The data area Itis the area where the user interacts with the system It offers a set of data for defining the graphic environment the subroutine that will be used to generate the machine movement and the machine parameters involved in the adjustment Selecting one of the data frames the group of parameters it belongs to Graphic environment data to be configured g gt e Number of divisions on
10. EDITING SIMULATION MODE 6 1 Appearance of the editing simulation 0 0 cee cece eeeeeeeeeee ee eeeeeeteeaee sees eetetaeeeeeaee 92 6 1 1 General Screen GeSCription csssecssesescssssssecessseesnsscsesceeeeeeeceeeeeseeeeeatecseess 93 6 1 2 Window description a 6 1 3 Icon description vertical SOftKeYS ee eee cere eet eeeeeteeeeeseeenaeeaeeee 95 6 2 oiite Alare oi AATETTA TT siabancecns sideanchusebacasterstcacesteebacsaa 97 6 2 1 Program editing su 99 6 2 2 Import DXF files 100 6 2 3 Syntax errors when editing 101 6 3 Editing window SOftk yS siisii an Ek cei Saaie S ELEI ERE 102 6 3 1 Opn PLO GhAM sssaaa i aa daaa 102 6 3 2 Filenin 103 6 3 3 UNO oi ces ccccestnarederses 104 6 3 4 Operations with blocks 6 3 5 Find replace 6 3 6 Customizing 6 3 7 Profile editor 6 3 8 CANMOGICY CIOS rsss adada aasad aiar A aa E ER ETa 110 6 3 9 TEACH IN ON TEACH IN OFF isisisi hiou i 111 6 4 Graphics WINdOW 0 ccccceceeceeee cece ittkittttitttttintinnsttannitantnnnannnanna anaa nanaannannn nananana 112 6 4 1 Program SIMULATION siais d aeaa ad ia aenda 114 6 4 2 Simulation errors 6 5 Graphic window SOfIk YS 3 0s0 c0c2ccc2ecicee cds cettestin iniii iaeiei 117 6 5 1 WW OG Ol Gla PICS ec f255 cesses cacaie aa a aA 117 6 5 2 ZOOM seie 118 6 5 3 Dimensions 120 6 5 4 Point of view 121 6 5 5 M asurgme htnt ia anA a Eaa anA A AEE des 122 6
11. FOLLOW ON FOLLOW OFF G112 Change the drive s parameter set DDSSETUP mode G31 Temporary polar origin shift to the center of interpolation Version history FAGOR 2 CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x Vil Version history FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x Vill Software V3 01 Feature Lathe model July 2005 New machine parameters CAN bus type selection CANMODE permit using the G95 function in jog mode FPRMAN Lathe model Graphics configuration selection GRAPHTYPECH Lathe model Axis configuration selection GEOCONFIG Set of parameters for synchronization SYNCSET Improved definition of kinematics for the C axis Magazine less system Commands CNCRD and CNCWR The channel number and the indexes may be defined in the variables using an integer a register or a symbol INST Ground tools for a turret magazine The TMOPERATION may take the values 3 4 9 and 10 INST Incline axis INST PRG Improved coordinate transformation CS ACS e Keep the part zero when deactivating the transformation e Working with 45 spindles Select between the two choices Keep the rotation of the plane axes with MODE 6 PRG G33 New parameter Q1 to define the entry angle PRG G63 Tool inspection is possible during rigid tapping PRG G112 G112 is no longer admitted for the spindle Kinetics definition when activating the C axis FACE CYL
12. The operator places the tools directly in the magazine without using the CNC Then the positions list must be updated Automatic load unload The operator places the tools in the spindle and the CNC places the tool in the magazine The positions list is updated automatically Initialize table The table can only be initialized when the CNC is READY The table is initialized from the vertical softkey menu Initializing the table eliminates all the data about the position of the tools in the magazine It also initializes the active tools table because the tool arrangement in the magazine has been changed Loading a tool The tool is loaded into the magazine using the vertical softkey menu Only the tools defined in the tool table may be loaded into the magazine and they must be defined as ground tools In other words they must not be in any position of the magazine of the spindle or in the claws of the tool changer eee Even if the magazines are configured for not admitting ground tools while machining they may be loaded into the magazine through this maneuver Depending on tool size when it is loaded into the magazine it may affect several positions Magazine management using the Load tool softkey This type of management is valid for loading tools both automatically and manually After pressing the softkey the user is asked what kind of loading to do 1 Press the softkey associated with tool loading 2 Enter the to
13. Vertical lathe Longitudinal machining Machining direction It is defined with an icon It indicates the tool s machining direction Icon Machining direction Undefined direction Right hand machining direction Left hand machining direction L Tool length This data is only shown on tools that are not for turning R Tool radius This data is only shown on tools that are not for turning L Tool length R Tool radius Le Cutting length LW Length wear Tool length wear offset This data is only shown on tools that are not for turning The CNC will add this value to the nominal length to calculate the real tool length Length L wear RW Radius wear Tool radius wear offset This data is only shown on tools that are not for turning The CNC will add this value to the nominal radius to calculate the actual real tool radius Radius R wear A tool with a radius of 20mm and a length of 134mm has a radius wear of 0 2mm and a length wear of 0 15mm the tool table should be set as follows Radius 20 mm Wear R 0 2 mm Length 134 mm Wear L 0 15 mm The CNC assumes as real dimensions the following Real radius gt 20 0 2 19 8mm Real length gt 134 0 15 133 85 mm A Cutter angle This data is only shown for turning tools C Cutting angle This data is only shown for turning tools Tool table O m TOOL AND MAGAZINE TABLE FAGOR CNC 80
14. X1 40 Y1 30 X2 Y2 Xc Yc Radius 20 Tangent Yes To select the available options To assume the selected option FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 137 Profile editor EDITING SIMULATION MODE FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 138 6 9 3 Profile definition With the softkey menu of this screen it is possible to define any profile a circular or a rectangular one or to configure the graphics screen When accessing the editing menu the softkey menu shows the following options O Profile To edit any profile by defining the straight and curved sections that make it up See 6 9 6 Defining any profile on page 141 O Circle For quickly defining a circular profile See 6 9 4 Circular profile definition on page 139 O Rectangle For quickly defining a rectangular profile See 6 9 5 Rectangular profile definition on page 140 O Expanding a profile For adding a straight line or an arc in any position of a previously edited profile O Import profile For importing a previously saved profile These profiles may also be imported in DXF format besides in ISO format O Undo To undo the last operation made O Save and continue To save the profile and continue editing Using this key does not require that the profile be completed O O O Operating manual 6 9 4 Circular profile definition XY Xcenter Ycenter Radius Direction Validate X1 Y1 XC YC
15. 1 Open the program at the editor or create a new program 2 Use the cursor to select the block where the new blocks will be inserted Edit the program blocks using the editing modes available 3 Save the program so it can be modified or executed later on This operation may be performed automatically as the program is being edited or if the editor has been personalized Available editing modes Any of the various editing modes available may be used while editing a program The available editing modes are CNC language It is edited block by block and each one may be written in ISO language or in High level language When editing high level commands and depending on the type of command the editor offers a list of available commands e Keying in V shows the list of CNC variables e Keying in shows the list of CNC instructions e Keying in shows the list of flow control instructions of the CNC In all of them when keying the following letter of the variable or instruction name the cursor of the list goes to the first command that starts with that letter The keys may be used to move the cursor through the list of commands and the ENTER key to enter the selected command into the block that is being edited Conversational editor for canned cycles To define machining and positioning canned cycles quickly and easily This mode offers the following advantages e There is no need to know the canned cycle parameter
16. 318 15 2 3 Hardware diagnosis CAN bus and SERCOS When selecting this element of the configuration the diagnosis window shows the software identification of the CNC s communications board version boot checksum and the type of buses connected to it Likewise it monitors the different voltage and temperature alarms CONFIGURATION CNC8070 0 Info Value Version 7 3 SOFTWARE AH cnceo70 0 5 Piggyback Type Bus 1 CAN Group 1 Bus 2 SERCOS Group 2 i Noda D Hardware Test Value VBattery No Battery v 514V HAW 11 48 IW 12 09 Temperature 33 C l Node 1 l Node 2 af Bus 2 SERCOS Sercos bus configuration e Listing of nodes and drive associated with each one of them For each drive it indicates its software version type of drive and the motor connected to it Can bus configuration e Resources connected and their status Groups connected and number of nodes that make up each group detected and active Detailed information of the selected group e Group resources and their status e Information about the nodes that make up the group Detailed information of the selected node e Software version boot and checksum of the code e Node status e Resources of each module The symbol next to the node indicates its status and its possible association O O O Operating manual S DIAGNOSIS Configuration diagnosis FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x
17. FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 1 3 2 Keyboard layout o 13 le 9 S 4 Depending on the utility of the different keys the CNC keyboard may be considered to be laid out as follows Work modes To access the different CNC work modes directly Automatic mode Jog mode MDI mode Editing simulation mode User tables Zero Offsets fixtures and arithmetic parameters Tool and magazine table Utilities mode Configurable mode Depending on how the OEM has set this key it will be possible to e Access a CNC work mode e Execute an application e Access the operating system e Carry out no function at all Numeric keypad It includes the necessary keys to enter numeric data and define the arithmetic operations as well as the following special keys Movement arrow keys They move the cursor one position to the left right up or down Previous or next page They show the previous or next page when the program part program or PLC program has more than one information page Home and end keys It moves the cursor the beginning or end of the line SHIFT ALT GR ALT CAPS ESC m z m D s m O gt E E Alphanumeric keyboard It includes the necessary keys to edit programs as well as the following special keys Shift key for capital letters By keeping it pressed and in combination with a another key it accesses a second
18. O New block It positions the cursor on the edit line O Modify Recovers the block selected by the cursor and it displays it on the edit line This option is the same as pressing ENTER O Delete It deletes the block selected by the cursor O Cancel edit It cancels the editing of the block and it shows an empty edit line This option is only available when editing a block O O O Operating manual O Delete all It deletes all the blocks from the block history O Save It saves all the history blocks as an independent program N MDI MODE Full MDI screen FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x MDI MODE Full MDI screen FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 158 7 3 1 Block execution In this window it is possible to edit and execute new blocks or the ones saved in the block history Block editing The blocks may be edited directly on the edit line or may be recalled from the block history Keys for selecting a block from history 0 Z To access the history and select a block To accept the selection and show the block on the edit line ESC To cancel the selection and quit the MDI mode The recalled blocks may be modified before executing them as if they were new ones The blocks edited or modified appearing on the edit line may be executed or saved in the block history Saving a block Press ENTER to save a block in the history without executing it If it is a new block it will be
19. The status of a position is indicated with a symbol next to the position number e The position is free white filled circle e The position is semi free black and white filled circle e The position is occupied black filled circle e The position is disabled red filled circle Tool number Number of the tool occupying the magazine position Remaining life If the tool life monitoring is active shows the remaining life either in machining time or in the number of operations to be carried out or the tool status rejected or worn out Tool family Family the tool belongs to defined by the user in the tool table 2 O O Operating manual 9 6 3 Magazine information The right panel shows different information about the status of the tool magazine and the tool changer arm This information is grouped as follows INFORMATION MAGAZINE STATUS status r TOOL CHANGER ARM M TOOL OF THE POSITION SELECTED ON THE LIST Enom 2 STATUS W Left pos Right Pos Co SMALL Ei SPECIAL JE MAGAZINE DATA A Magazine status B Tool in the claws of the changer arm C Tool selected on the list D Magazine data Magazine status This area shows the operation being carried out in the magazine In standby The magazine is in standby Loading A tool is being loaded into the magazine Unloading A tool is being unloaded from the magazine The Status led informs the user whether the maga
20. Execution cycle time CyTime of the program and number of parts made Partc I CNC messages Softkey menus When selecting the program screen on the softkey menus the options associated with that window will be displayed The options available in the softkey menu are the following See 3 3 Data screen softkeys on page 41 O First block To set the first block of the execution O Stop condition To select the block where the execution of the program or subroutine will be interrupted O Block search To recover the program history up to a particular block and resume execution from that block on O Find text To find text in a program O Go to line To position the cursor on a particular line of the program 3 3 Data screen softkeys 3 3 1 First block It sets the block currently selected with the cursor as the first block to begin execution When not setting the starting block the program will begin executing from the first block The last block may be selected using the cursor or the Find text or Go to line options of the softkey menu Keys to move the cursor B g Moves the cursor line by line gt To move the cursor page by page ee rore Moves the cursor to the first block or to the end of the program Data screen softkeys ioe AUTOMATIC MODE The first block being set remains active until it is canceled using the ESC key or until the program is exe
21. RADIUS DIRECTION The softkey menu shows the necessary options for defining a circular profile To return to the main menu press the key for the previous menu To define the coordinates of the profile s starting point To define the profile s center coordinate along the abscissa axis To define the profile s center coordinate along the ordinate axis To define the profile radius To define the direction of the profile clockwise or counterclockwise To accept and draw the defined profile Clockwise arc Counterclockwise arc Coordinates of the profile s starting point Profile s center coordinates Radius of the profile The data is defined in the data area of the screen where the following information is shown Coordinates of the profile s starting point Profile s center coordinate along the abscissa axis Profile s center coordinate along the ordinate axis Radius of the arc It indicates the direction of the profile Profile editor e gt E EDITING SIMULATION MODE FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 139 Torn erating manisa O O O Operating manual Profile editor EDITING SIMULATION MODE FAGOR CNC 8070 SoFT V03 0x 140 6 9 5 Rectangular profile definition XY Length X Length Y Angle Direction Validate X1 Y1 XL YL ANGLE DIRECTION The softkey menu shows the necessary options for defining a rectangular profile To return to the main menu press the key for
22. The group of options shown on this menu may be expanded with the softkey associated with the icon that offers a different set of options The options shown for the tool table are Bear in mind that the table is divided into two panels There are options that are valid for both panels and options that are only available on one of them Display units millimeters inches It is used to change the units for data display The change of units is only valid for display and data entry For programming the CNC assumes the units set by the active function G70 or G71 The icon highlights the units currently selected millimeters or inches Find text To search for a text on a tool list See 9 1 2 Search fora text in the tables on page 173 Add tool This icon is only available for the tool list It adds a new tool to the list Delete tool This icon is only available for the tool list It removes a tool from the list A tool cannot be deleted if it is in the tool magazine Delete data This icon is only available for tool data It deletes the data where the cursor is When deleting a data it assumes its default value Configuring the tool table This icon is only available for tool data It is used to configure the data shown in the tool table Initializing the table The table can only be initialized when the CNC is READY It initializes the tool table The CNC will request confirmation of the command Init
23. To return to the main menu press the key for the previous menu e Go to the beginning It moves the indicator cursor and the current graphic view to the beginning of the trace e Go to the end It moves the indicator cursor and the current graphic view to the end of the trace e Go to the time It moves the indicator cursor and the current graphic view to the time value set by the operator with respect to the base point of the trace starting point of the trace if there is no trigger or to the trigger point if there is one Go to trigger It moves the indicator cursor and the current graphic view to the trigger point e Go to reference It moves the indicator cursor and the current graphic view to the reference point defined earlier e Set reference It sets a reference point at the current cursor position for time difference calculation e Remove reference Removes the reference point defined earlier Trace view Edit view It toggles between the graphic window and the data and display conditions area MS milliseconds US microseconds It toggles between milliseconds 0 001 3 seconds and microseconds 1 06 seconds Print It is used to print the graph on a printer connected to the CNC or as a BMP file in the CNC When printing to a file it is saved in the folder C Cnc8070 Mtb PIc Watch bmp 11 9 4 Customize the appearance of the logic analyzer It is used to customize the looks of the different elements
24. attribute of the selected files This attribute allows protecting the files so they cannot be modified in the editing mode The attributes column shows the letter M indicating that the program may be modified When a program is NOT modifiable its contents may be viewed but cannot be modified Hidden file H It is used to changed the hidden attribute of the selected files This attribute allows protecting the files so they are not displayed when selecting a program to be edited or executed The attributes column shows the letter H indicating that the program will be hidden not visible However a hidden program may be deleted if its number is known therefore it is recommended to remove the modifiable attribute M in order to avoid deleting it 1 0 Remove file It is used for deleting the selected folder or files To delete the files the CNC will show a dialog box requesting confirmation of the command whereas the empty folders will be deleted directly without requesting confirmation UTILITIES MODE Appearance of the utilities mode The folders can only be deleted if they are empty FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 209 10 ee T x lt ae n w 2 E S as Es gt D FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 210 10 2 Utilities Softkeys 10 2 1 Sorted by It is used to order the list of files When selecting this option the softkey menu shows the different ordering options
25. mode is active the simulation will take place until the end of the program or up to the block selected as end of simulation Check program syntax It analyzes the program looking for syntax errors If there are no errors the bottom of the screen will display a message indicating that the program is correct If there are syntax errors they will be shown at the bottom of the editing window ah EDITING SIMULATION MODE Appearance of the editing simulation FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 95 O O O Operating manual J EDITING SIMULATION MODE Appearance of the editing simulation FAGOR CNC 8070 SoFT V03 0x 96 Time estimates This icon is only available when the statistics window is displayed It offers an estimate of the total execution time at 100 of the programmed feedrate For this time estimate the CNC analyzes e The machining and positioning time for each tool used in the program e The number of M functions that are executed e The number of tool changes performed The result will appear at the statistics window Simulation setup It shows the simulation setup options e Activate and cancel tool radius compensation e Conditional stop e Activate and deactivate the software travel limits e Block skip condition Cancel the channel synchronization in the simulation 6 2 Editing window It may be used to edit modify or see the contents of a part program and check the program
26. or M30 When selecting this option the softkey menu of the CNC shows the options available for selecting the stop condition To return to the main menu press the key for the previous menu Subroutine selection To select the stop condition in a global subroutine which has been called upon from the program When selecting this option the CNC shows a list of programs available for selecting the desired subroutine Keys for selecting a program 4 2 To move the cursor thru the elements of the window To open the selected subroutine ESC To cancel the selection and close the program listing To select a subroutine from the list 1 Select from the list the program containing the subroutine or write its name in the bottom window 2 Press ENTER to open the program or ESC to cancel the selection and close the program listing The program window will show the contents of the selected subroutine Last block It sets the cursor position as the block where simulation is interrupted If no last block is established the simulation of the program will end after executing one of the end of program functions M02 or M30 The last block may be selected using the cursor or the Find text or Go to line options of the softkey menu Keys to move the cursor B g Moves the cursor line by line B To move the cursor page by page E rore Moves the cursor to the first block or to the en
27. softkeys Refresh It refreshes the table information Print It is used to print the tables out to a printer connected to the CNC or to a file PRN at the CNC When printing to a file it is saved in the folder 1 C Cnc8070 Users Reports prn When selecting this option the CNC shows a dialog box requesting the destination for the file printer or file When printing to a file it is possible to select the name and location of the file PLC Statistics service Print destination SELECT PRINT DESTINATION x PRINTER To select the print destination To print the drawing To cancel the printing ESC After selecting the destination press ENTER to print the table or ESC to cancel it FAGOR 8070 CNC Sort V03 0x 247 mm h PLC Messages service FAGOR 8070 CNC Sort V03 0x 248 11 13 Messages service The Messages service may be used to edit the texts associated with PLC messages and errors These files may also be displayed and edited and thus translated into other languages using any text editor The message and error files are stored in the folder C CNC8070 MTB PLC LANG lt language gt corresponding to the language active at the CNC To use messages and errors in other languages copy the files to the folder of the desired language On CNC power up the messages and errors are loaded from the folder corresponding to the la
28. 00030 000 Y 00050 000 il z meon L D A Display area It shows a graphic representation of the tool paths or of the part as the program is being simulated B Dialog area It shows the position of the axes and the machining conditions active during simulation feedrate spindle speed tool and tool offset When selecting specific options of the softkey menu it shows the information associated with that option which may be defined by the user C Information area Shows the work plane appearing in the display area and an illustration representing the size of the graph and the portion of the graphic area selected with the zoom On 3D graphics the illustration shows the point of view of the graph displayed and it may be changed by the operator Keys for selecting the point of view Select a new point of view Rete Assumes the new point of view selected ESC Cancels the selected point point of view D G functions active during simulation Softkey menus of the graphics window When selecting the graphic window the horizontal softkey menu shows the options associated with that window The set of options offered by this menu may be changed using the softkey which offers a new set of options The options available in the softkey menu are the following See 6 5 Graphic window softkeys on page 117 O Type of graphics To select the type of graphics O ZOOM To enlarge
29. 21 2319 0 3257 0 8409 S 28 2250 0 5417 0 9840 a830 F m S a S Cc 158000 0 E a S 38 9810 s S 44 7079 IZ 2 48 2049 5 50 4690 A Name of the selected machine parameter table B Compensation point C User defined axis position D Amount of error to compensate in the positive direction E Amount of error to compensate in the negative direction F Parameter description The section on 12 3 1 Data editing and validation in this chapter shows how to edit the parameters of the tables ee ee Se a To obtain further information about the data appearing in the table refer to the chapter on machine parameters of the Installation and Start up Manual FAGOR 2 CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 12 3 Operations with tables 12 3 1 Data editing and validation Use the softkey menu to select the desired machine parameter table To edit the table data proceed as follows 1 Use the cursor to select the parameter whose value is to be set 2 Key in the desired value If SUP is pressed the parameter willassume the default value g N 3 Press ENTER to accept the new value or ESC to ignore the new value and recover the previous one a g w oO e g Parameter types u i q Certain parameters can only assume specific values These parameters will be c a identified as follows a w o The parameter has a list of options T O lt q al The parameter refers to a file De
30. 5 6 CIGARS COON sss EE E S RNE 122 6 5 7 Colors 6 5 8 Options 6 5 9 Speed s 6 6 Program WiIMGOW visz c 0ceviscci eesti oeaceCedetcteeseet eran n adian A ENE E Sa Aaa 126 6 7 Program window SOftkeyS c ccccceecesceeeceeeceeceaeeeeeeaeeeseaaeeesaaeeeeaaeeeesaeeeeeaeeees 128 6 7 1 First block n 6 7 2 SOP CONdINON A n Sa EEE a SA D EEN 6 7 3 OE Era cscs E EEE E AE EET 6 7 4 leton Allal AT E E E A terry ore 6 8 Statistics window 6 8 1 Time estimates s 6 9 iaoi Eo liro ar PETTE ET 6 9 1 Operating procedur sssri 5 saaicondssdatassnesaeaecandeedenacanttactnaquededenastadabenaccnedadazoetes 136 6 9 2 Data editing 137 6 9 3 Profile definition 138 6 9 4 Circular profile definition 139 6 9 5 Rectangular profile definition 2 00 2 eee cece eeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeaeee seas eeeeeaeeeteaeeenee 140 6 9 6 DO TIMING ANY DOT weicc8 caret etcetera eaiettte tected tt ade anaes 141 6 9 7 Modify a profile and insert corners 6 9 8 Display area 6 9 9 Work plane definition i 6 9 10 iaie PEE E E E T 6 9 11 Profil editor Example Wecscccecienctvieiten tens adalat Beane 6 9 12 Profile editor Example 2 6 9 13 Profile editor Example 3 0 ccccececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eee aeeeceeeeeeaeeeseaeeeeseeeeteeaeeetes CHAPTER 7 CHAPTER 8 CHAPTER 9 CHAPTER 10 CHAPTER 11 MDI MODE 7 1 Appearance of the MDI MOde
31. Consulting the PV210 variable 36 Consulting the variable SV1 Sercos ID 36 RV9 23 It assigns the value of 23 to the variable RV9 S36 100 It assigns the value of 100 to variable S36 Sercos ID 36 If not indicated otherwise itaccesses the variables of the drive selected in the service To access those of a particular drive select it in the service or add a suffix with the axis name to the mnemonic or Sercos ID PV210 Y It consults the variable PV210 of the Y axis drive 36 S Consulting variable Sercos ID 16 of the spindle drive oath gt DDSSETUP Command bar FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 303 DDSSETUP F Changing the drives accessing level FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 304 14 4 Changing the drives accessing level A The parameters variables and commands of the drive are organized by access levels To access each parameter the drive must be configured at the access level required by that parameter A password is needed to access each level This softkey is used to change the access level for drive parameters Pressing this softkey shows a window that requests the password to quit the basic level and access a new level The available access levels are the following e Basic level USER Itis the default level itis accessed when entering the DDSSetup mode It requires no password The user level gives access to a group of parameters that slightly
32. FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 23 O O O Operating manual File selection window HOW TO OPERATE THE CNC FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 24 File search It is used to look for files whose names contain a particular character string When selecting this option the CNC shows a dialog box requesting the text to be found FIND Find what The programs are searched one by one It may be searched using either the softkey menu or the following keys EAG To search for the next program in descending order To search for the previous program in ascending order To end the search and close the dialog box When defining a search the softkey menu shows the Next and Previous options e Search next it looks for the next program in descending order e Search previous it looks for the previous program in ascending order Depending on how the search is carried out the focus goes to the last file found whose name also appears at the top of the window To end the search press ESC 2 6 Calculator The calculator may be accessed from any task window or directly using the key combination CTRL K Press ESC to close the calculator The calculator may be accessed from any operating mode When accessing from an editable element the result displayed by the calculator may be inserted An editable element is any element that may have a focus or cursor such as the program editor tabl
33. G37 120 x80 Y 80 x20 Y20 G38 120 LINE 2 COLUMN 10 AUTONUM CAP OVR NUM When TEACH IN mode is active it is possible to keep editing the coordinates of the axes directly from the keyboard or they may be assigned the current position of the machine axes Both editing methods may be used indistinctly even while defining a block To define the coordinates of one or several axes using TEACH IN 1 Move the axes to the desired position using the JOG keys the handwheels or the MDI mode 2 Inthe part program edit the name of the axes whose position is to be defined or not select any axis if you wish to define the position of all of them 3 Press the RECALL key e If an axis has been edited the CNC assigns the current position of that axis as the program coordinate The axis is displayed in the TEACH IN window e f no axis has been edited a block is edited with the current position of all the axes defined as selected for the TEACH IN mode See 6 3 6 Customizing on page 107 Editing window softkeys Gp EDITING SIMULATION MODE FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 111 Graphics window EDITING SIMULATION MODE FAGOR CNC 8070 SoFT V03 0x 112 6 4 Graphics window It is used to show a graphic representation of the program being simulated and take measurements over the drawing Description of the graphics window The graphic window shows the following information X
34. MMC This directory keeps the information regarding the PLC integrated by the machine builder e The directory PLC LANG contains the PLC messages and error messages in the different languages e The directory PLC PROJECT contains the files that make up the PLC project and the object file e The directory PLC WATCH contains the sets saved from monitoring and the logic analyzer When the machine builder integrates his her own application into the CNC the components that have been created OCX files will have to be located in this directory When the machine builder integrates his her own subroutines tool change home search etc they will have to located in this directory This directory stores the configurations saved by the user in the setup assistance oxen GENERAL CONCEPTS Directory structure FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 11 GENERAL CONCEPTS Directory structure FAGOR CNC 8070 SoFT V03 0x 12 1 4 2 USERS directory POCKET PRG PROFILE REPORTS It is especially directed at users The purpose of this directory is to provide the user with a memory space for storing part programs profiles etc as they are generated Although the user may store these programs in any directory they should be saved in the directories created for this purpose in order to make it easier and faster to find them and make safety backup copies This directory saves the profiles t
35. SoFT V03 0x 74 4 3 Spindle control The spindle may be controlled manually using the following keys of the operator panel The keys always refer to the master spindle of the active channel The spindle speed should be set in the MDI mode before selecting the turning direction thus avoiding a sudden start of the spindle when setting an S because the turning direction was active Starts the spindle clockwise Same as function M03 Starts the spindle clockwise at the active speed A Displays function MO3 in the history of the current machining conditions Start the spindle counteclockwise Same as function M04 Starts the spindle counterclockwise at the active speed LU Displays function M04 in the history of the current machining conditions To stop the spindle Same as function M05 To stop the spindle 2 Displays function MO5 in the history of the current machining conditions Spindle speed override It may be used to vary the spindle turning speed a typical value being a variation between 50 and 120 Every time one of these keys is pressed the speed varies 5 These values may be different depending on how the machine manufacturer has defined them Spindle orientation Same as function M19 It orients the spindle 2 Displays function M19 in the history of the current machining conditions Customizing the keys The machine manufacturer sets the minimum and maximu
36. To return to the previous menu press the key for the previous menu The file list may be ordered alphabetically by size by data or by type When pressing the same ordering criteria twice the CNC toggles from ascending to descending and vice versa The softkey menu shows the ordering criteria currently selected the softkey will appear pressed 10 2 2 Options It is used to personalize how the program listing will be displayed on the screen When selecting this option the softkey menu shows the following personalizing options To return to the previous menu press the key for the previous menu Update It updates the list of files showing the files of the folder currently selected Only when the auto update option is not active Auto update When this option is selected the softkey will appear pressed every time a folder is selected the CNC will automatically update the list of files Column adjust When this option is selected the softkey will appear pressed the columns of the file lists will adjust to the text they contain so as to show the text that may be truncated because it is too long Reset all It closes the folder tree layout and it only shows the devices floppy disk Ethernet network etc connected to the CNC Show hidden files When this option is selected the softkey will appear pressed the file list shows all the files of the selected folder even those having the hidden attributes Oth
37. Turning the unit off incorrectly may cause the loss of information about e Active offsets zero offsets part offset etc e Coordinates e Parts counter e Active axis sets e Information about the next tool If on power up it displays the error 12 Checksum error in CNC data it means that the CNC has been turned incorrectly due to a power failure etc and consequently that information has been lost When this error message is displayed home reference the axes again and activate the offsets part zero included and the sets of axes coments GENERAL CONCEPTS Turning the CNC on and off FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 1 2 1 Emergency shutdown with battery The central unit PC104 is powered by an external 24Vdc power supply Optionally an external battery may be connected to ensure the detection of power supply voltage drops and that the unit is turned off properly When a power supply failure occurs 24V voltage drop and there is a battery connected to the central unit the latter responds as follows e If the supply is interrupted for less than 2 seconds 1 The screens shows the corresponding warning and the system recovers fine 5 CAN errors may occur due to the lack of 24V at the remote modules e If the supply is interrupted for more than 2 seconds After the 2 seconds the screen shows the corresponding error and it initiates the automatic turn off sequence First it stops the machine if it is in ex
38. description oO d e F ie J The editing window shows the following information wg z piTor PLCPRG PLC E CYL D f SERVOION SERVOZON SERVO3ON SERVO4ON SERVOSON SERVO6GON Q DRENAX DRENAY DRENAZ DRENA4 DRENAS DRENA6 A i SPENA1 SPENA2 SPENA3 SPENA4 SPENAS SPENA6 MOV i R100 MOV O R101 CNCWR R101 PLC TIMER M11 END PRG START CYSTART Cambio de gama del cabezal PRRRAAAA REAR RAR R RRR ARETE DM41 GEARI DM42 GEAR2 DN43 GEARS DM44 GEAR4 LINE 1 COLUMN 1 cm ove Num A Title bar Name of the program selected for editing An next to the program name means that the changes made to the program have not been saved the program must be saved so they do not get lost B Edit area Program editing area showing its contents C Status bar Information about cursor position and the status of the editor options such as CAP Capital letters When active the text is always written in capital letters OVR Overwrite text It toggles between overwriting and inserting text When active it overwrites the existing text NUM Numeric keypad active Softkey menu FAGOR When accessing the PLC program editor the horizontal softkey menu will show all 8070 CNC the options associated with editing a file Sort V03 0x 224 11 4 Program editing softkeys 11 4 1 Analyze 11 4 2 File It analyzes the program searching for errors The errors f
39. diagnosis mode FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 316 ual 15 1 2 Icon description vertical softkeys The icon menu always shows all the icons related to this work mode The icons are activated with their associated softkey F8 to F12 List of icons Update data It is used to update refresh the data of the diagnosis window Print table It prints the information of the configuration out to a printer connected to the CNC or as a file at the CNC in PRN format 2 O O Operating manual 15 2 Configuration diagnosis 15 2 1 System diagnosis When selecting this configuration element the diagnosis window shows the list of the system elements and their values CONFIGURATION A SYSTEM B 1 8070 CNC Version i IDIC 2 soFTWwaRE Da ID3P HE cnceo70 0 ID4H a 2 Val Code fo Windows lic n O lt lt Windows Version z D User oO AS Number of Processors Oo Processor Intel Pentium III 452 MHz lt a c Physical Memory 65012 KB a fo Total Virtual Memory 2093056 KB Free Virtual Memory 1952064 KB wo Free Physical Memory on drive C 1143840 KB 5 D Z e O A System elements B Element values FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 317 2 O O Operating manual 15 2 2 Software diagnosis This option may be used to analyze the modules that make up the CNC software and the software options installed Module information When selecting this configuration el
40. draw the rapid traverse The color to draw the canned cycles The color to draw the compensated path The color to draw the theoretical path 3 The color to draw the threading The color to represent the real coordinates The real coordinate is the actual position of the tool which differs from the command coordinate in the amount of following error axis lag The background color of the window O Colors for solids When a solid graphics is active the following colors may be defined The color to draw the outside X AUTOMATIC MODE Graphic screen softkeys The color to draw the inside X The color to draw the outside Y The color to draw the inside Y The color to draw the outside Z The color to draw the inside Z The background color of the window 3 When selecting this option the softkey menu shows the available options To return to the main menu press the key for the previous menu Colors Apply Itassumes the new colors and applies them to the blocks drawn next If the new colors are not applied the graphics are drawn with the old colors Colors Edit It is used to select the new colors for the graphics They are selected in the dialog area of the graphic window that show the current colors Keys for defining colors 0 Z To move the cursor through the data To open and close the color palettes To move the cursor through the colors of the palette v ESC To cancel th
41. each channel Table of local parameters There are seven tables for each channel one table per level e Table of common parameters The table is common to all the channels Standard configuration The standard configuration of this work mode described in this manual corresponds to the one supplied by Fagor In some cases the manual shows a sample screen instead of that of the CNC in order to make it easier to understand 8 1 1 Icon description vertical softkeys Lt SH The icons are activated with their associated softkey F8 to F12 The icon menu offers all the options for the selected table The group of icons of this menu may be expanded with the softkey associated with the icon that offers anew set of icons List of icons Display units millimeters inches To toggle the units for the position of the linear axes Toggling these units does not affect the rotary axes which will always be displayed in degrees The icon highlights the units currently selected millimeters or inches It must be borne in mind that the unit change is only valid for display and data entry Aprogram assumes the units defined with the active function G70 or G71 or when not programmed the units set by the machine manufacturer Initialize table Resets all the table data to 0 The CNC will request confirmation of the command Find text It is used to find a text or a value in the table When selecting this optio
42. feedrate depends on how fast the handwheel is turned v Individual handwheel The individual handwheel is associated with a particular axis The CNC moves each axis as its relevant handwheel is turned depending on the setting of the selector switch and on the turning direction of the handwheel When moving several axes simultaneously using handwheels all the axes having their own handwheel plus another one selected with the general handwheel may be involved When moving several axes at the same time the feedrate of each axis depends on how fast its associated handwheel is turned e a aa SS It may happen that depending on the turning speed and the selector position the CNC be demanded a faster feedrate than the maximum allowed In that case the CNC will move the axis the indicated distance but at the maximum feedrate allowed MANUAL JOG MODE Operations with the axes FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 71 MANUAL JOG MODE Operations with the axes FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 72 4 2 4 Moving an axis to a particular position coordinate When moving the axes to a specific position they must do so one by one following these steps 1 Select the axis to be homed using the alphanumeric keyboard The CNC will highlight that axis to indicate that it is selected To select the numbered axes e g X1 select any axis and then move the selection until positioning on the desired one The fo
43. for the probe which will only be valid for the defined calibration The new position does not affect the values defined in the machine parameters x lt N The data for defining the new probe position is accessed using the vertical softkey menu Tool calibration For milling and lathe tools it calibrates the tool offsets on each axis The offset wears are set to zero MANUAL JOG MODE TOOL CALIBRATION Automatic calibration with a probe and a canned cycle Ol FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 89 MANUAL JOG MODE TOOL CALIBRATION Automatic calibration with a probe and a canned cycle FAGOR CNC 8070 SoFT V03 0x 90 Definition of data To define the data place the focus on the relevant data key in the desired value and press ENTER To change icons place the focus on it and press SPACE p pe C Probing feedrate If not defined the movements are carried out at the default feedrate set by the machine manufacturer PRB1MAX Probe position e The values defined here are only taken into account during the PRB2MIN calibration cycle they do not modify the machine parameter values Tool calibration steps To calibrate the length follow these steps 1 Select the tool and the offset to be calibrated It is not necessary to insert the tool into the spindle the CNC carries out this operation if necessary 2 Define the data defining the calibration 3 Press the CYCLE START key to star
44. is 2 Select the file or write its name at the bottom window 3 Press ENTER to accept the selection or ESC to cancel it and close the file listing Print table It prints the message and error table out to a printer connected to the CNC or as a file PRN format at the CNC When printing to a file it is saved in the folder C Cnc8070 Users Reports prn When selecting this option the CNC will show a dialog box requesting the destination for the table printer or file Print destination SELECT PRINT DESTINATION x PRINTER To select the print destination To print the drawing ESC To cancel the printing After selecting the destination press ENTER to print the table or ESC to cancel it FAGOR 8070 CNC Sort V03 0x 253 O O O Operation manual h Gi PLC Messages service FAGOR 8070 CNC SOFT V03 0x MACHINE PARAMETERS K In order for the machine tool to be able to properly execute the programmed instructions the CNC must know the specific data of the machine such as feedrates accelerations feedback automatic tool change etc This data is set by the machine manufacturer and must be defined in the machine parameter table Selecting the machine parameter tables The machine parameter tables may be accessed either using the user key if it has been set accordingly or from the task window The task window may be accessed with key
45. jog Theoretical path simulation Definition of the first block of a block search Confirm that the CNC is not in automatic mode when executing a program Syntax check in MDI Software V2 01 January 2005 S Q Feature 2 Operation under Windows XP INST Emergency shutdown with battery Central unit PC 104 OPT New languages Basque and Portuguese INST Multi channel system up to 4 channels INST e Spindle swapping PRG e Axis swapping OPT e Communication and synchronization between channels e Common arithmetic parameters e Access to variables per channel Multi spindle system up to 4 spindles PRG INST Tool management with up to 4 magazines INST Tandem axis INST New kinematics table spindle TYPE13 to TYPE16 INST New kinematics for C axis TYPE 41 to TYPE 43 INST Parameter matching between the CNC and the Sercos drive INST New machine parameters INST e Warning level on Gantry axes WARNCOUPE e Placing the vertical softkeys on the right or on the left VMENU e Apply cross compensation to either theoretical or real coordinates TYPCROSS e Apply leadscrew compensation to either theoretical or real coordinates TYPLSCRW e Defining the default compensation mode IRCOMP e Defining the type of reference pulse REFPULSE e Memory sharing between applications PLCDATASIZE e Generic OEM machine parameters MTBPAR e Reading Sercos variab
46. last block for program history recovery the one currently selected with the cursor If the program is executed next it resumes at this block The last block may be selected using the cursor orthe Find text or Go to line options of the softkey menu Keys to move the cursor i Moves the cursor line by line To move the cursor page by page Moves the cursor to the first block or to the end of the program Number of times It sets as stop condition that the block selected as the stop block has been executed a specific number of times When selecting this option the CNC requests the number of times that the block must be executed before ending the history recovery After entering the number of times press ENTER to validate the value or ESC to cancel it If a block containing a multiple machining cycle in ISO code G160 G161 G162 G163 G164 G165 or of the cycle editor L MULTIPLE CYC has been selected as a stop block the block search will end just before the beginning of the nth modal cycle repeated in the multiple machining Automatic search With this option it is possible to recover the program history up to the block where the execution was interrupted The CNC remembers the block where it was interrupted therefore the stop block needs not be set Starting block It establishes the block currently selected with the cursor as the first block of the block search If the firs
47. leadscrew and cross compensation tables g MACHINE PARAMETERS Appearance of the machine parameter tables FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x O O O Operating manual 12 2 Parameter table description The machine parameter tables have the following structure GENERA RAMETERS B 16 0 Trapezoidal M MACHINE PARAMETERS N Parameter table description Name of the selected machine parameter table Parameter list Parameter value set by the user Units used to define the parameter Limit values for the parameter m m0o0O0 WD gt Default value of the parameter G Parameter description The section on 12 3 1 Data editing and validation in this chapter shows how to edit the parameters of the tables Certain parameters cannot be edited they only access a set of parameters or a data table These parameters will be identified as follows To access a group of parameters To access a data table To access the data associated with the parameter select the parameter with the cursor and press ENTER To return to the previous parameter table press ESC To obtain further information about the data appearing in the table refer to the chapter on machine parameters of the Installation and Start up Manual FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 2 O O Operating manual 12 2 1 M function setting table This table is accessed using the M function machine parame
48. line ESC To cancel the selection and quit the MDI mode The recalled blocks may be modified before executing them as if they were new ones Block execution The block on the edit line is executed by pressing START atthe operator panel Once the block has been executed is saved in the block history The STOP key interrupts the execution of the block Press START again to resume execution from where it was interrupted The RESET key cancels the execution of the block and resets the CNC to its initial conditions N MDI MODE Standard MDI window FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 155 O O O Operating manual MDI MODE Full MDI screen FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 156 7 3 Full MDI screen This window shows the blocks saved so far and the edit line of the MDI mode It is possible to edit and execute new blocks or recover blocks saved in the block history which may be modified before executing them Description The full MDI mode screen shows the following information A History of edited blocks The block history shows a list of the blocks edited in MDI mode Every time a new block is edited it is added to this history B Edit line The blocks to be executed are edited on the edit line Blocks are edited one by one Softkey menu When selecting the full screen the horizontal softkeys show the options related to this window The options available in the softkeys menu are
49. magazine Magazine TPM Tool magazine table if there are several magazines Magazine1 TPM Magazine4 TPM TOOL AND MAGAZINE TABLE Showing tables and common operations Considerations for saving and loading tables Although each table may be saved separately it is recommended to always have a copy of all the tables Also the following must be borne in mind when loading the tables e Loading the tool table initializes the magazine tables and the active tools table When changing the list of available tools it may not be coherent with the tool distribution in the magazine or in the spindles This is why after loading this table it is necessary to define or load the magazine tables and the active tools table if any in that order e Loading the magazine table initializes the active tools table This is because when loading the magazine tables the new tool arrangement may not be coherent with the active tools This is why after loading this table it is necessary to load the active tools table Save the tables The tables may be saved one by one or all of them simultaneously In either case the actionis carried out from the vertical softkey menu using one of the following icons Saving all the tables at the same time E SH To save all the tables at the same time no table must be selected See 9 1 1 Table selection on page 172 Saving each table separately FAGOR gt H To save the tables one by one select each ta
50. make a backup copy of the data of the MTB folder in order to be able to restore this configuration later on if necessary The backup is saved in a single file Both the folder being backed up and the file name it is saved in may be configured When not indicated otherwise it makes a backup of the MTB folder and it saves it in the mtb r file in unit A en Configuring backup options The backup options may be defined using the Backup options softkey As backup options it is possible to define both the folder being backed up and the name of the i 2 file containing the data By default it makes a backup of the MTB folder and it saves E 8 it in the mtb r file in unit A 55 The CNC saves the defined options in a file called backup ini If this file does not exist when making or restoring a backup the default values will be used Making a data backup The backup is made using the automatic backup softkey Pressing this softkey makes a safety copy of the data of the indicated folder The data is saved in the selected file When not indicated otherwise or if the backup ini file does not exist it will make a backup of the MTB folder and will save it in the mtb r file in unit A Restoring data from a backup file Backup data is restored using the Restore backup softkey Pressing this key copes the data from the indicated file to its original folder i E To the folder that was backed up If thi
51. mode described in this manual corresponds to the one supplied by Fagor In some cases the manual shows a sample screen instead of that of the CNC in order to make it easier to understand These screens may be customized by the machine manufacturer changing its contents as well as its appearance They may also remove certain screens or add some of their own 3 1 1 Description of the screens As mentioned earlier the automatic mode may consist of one or several of the following screens later sections of this chapter describe each one in further detail Data screen They show execution related data axis position M and G function history active tool and tool offset spindle speed and axis feedrate When this screens shows a window with the program selected for execution it will be possible to select the execution starting and ending conditions as well as to recover the program history up to a particular block T 000000001 D 0i NxTool 000000000 Sreal 00000 Sprog 00000 S 100 Freal 00000 Fprog 00000 F 100 CyTime 0 00 00 00 Partc 0000 Information on program execution Graphic screen It shows a graphic representation of the program during execution It also allows taking measurements on the graphics XxX 00030 000 Y 00050 000 Z 00020 000 Nn Graphic representation of the execution of the program a AUTOMATIC MODE Displaying the automatic mode FAGOR 2 CNC 8
52. must have the editing focus on it Use the keys to select another editable data or field It is a rotary selection if the t key pressed when the first element of the screen is selected the focus goes to the last element whereas if the is pressed when the last element is selected the focus goes to the first element Not all the fields are editable only the ones that may be selected can be edited those having the focus There are two types of editable fields O Editable values They may be assigned a value either a two digit number or alphanumeric numbers and letters Before validating the data it is checked out and if it is not correct it will not be accepted and a warning message will be issued O Values that may be selected The possible data are fixed one of them must be selected Use the keys to see the possible values For this type of values that are icons the SPACE key has the same effect as the key 13 1 4 Machine parameter editing G Here is a list of machine parameters and variables of the drive that may be modified from the oscilloscope The new values are assumed by the CNC after pressing ENTER and they are maintained until the unit is turned off Once the setup is completed the changes must be saved so they can be effective next time the CNC is turned on Use the VALIDATE softkey to save the data The CNC saves the new values in the CNC tables and or in the drive tables acco
53. name of the parameter and the set separated by a period When modifying any parameter of the previous table the change is effective immediately without having to reset or restart the unit even when there is a program in execution The drive parameters modified with this method are functional immediately but these values will be lost when the drive is turned off Use the Save to flash option to maintain the modified values of those machine parameters Saving loading and resetting the condigurations When defining a new configuration of variables to be displayed and parameters modified at the oscilloscope the system allows saving that configuration into a file Likewise the system allows loading a configuration that was saved previously or resetting the current configuration Save To save the current configuration go to the configuration screen and press the Save softkey After this a new screen appears showing the available configurations with the focus on the last one Also it is possible to rename the new configuration whose extension must be osc Load To load a previously saved configuration go to the configuration screen and press the Load softkey Then anew screen appears showing a list of previously saved configurations being possible to select any of them Reset Pressing the Reset softkey of the configuration screen deletes or initializes the current configuration There are neither variables nor pa
54. new program ESC To cancel the selection and close the programs listing To save the table data proceed as follows 1 Select the destination folder 2 Define the file name at the bottom window To replace an existing file select it from the list 3 Press ENTER to save the file or ESC to return to the table without saving the file Depending on the table being saved the CNC will assign one of the following extensions to the file Extension Table type UPO Zero offset table UPF Fixture table UPP Parameter tables Recall a table It may be used to restore the table data in ASCII format from a file After selecting the table whose data is to be restored press the LOAD icon and the CNC shows a list with the tables that are already saved To recover the table data proceed as follows 1 Select the folder containing the file 2 Select the file from the list or write its name in the bottom window 3 Press ENTER to recall the data from the file or ESC to return to the table without recalling the data Sa iy 2 a Oo m g lt c e Z oc u 2 8s w o om O FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 169 O O O Operating manual 8 5 3 Find text It is used to find text or a value in the table To perform the search press the FIND icon and the CNC will show a dialog box requesting the text or value to be searched It is also possible to select whether the search must start at the beg
55. of the logic analyzer T To move the cursor to the upper lower left or right cell e ome To move the cursor to the beginning end of the row B To move the cursor to the beginning end of the column Press ENTER every time a data is edited to accept the new value or ESC to cancel it To delete a message from the table select it with the cursor and press the Delete softkey Errors To add a new error to the table press the New error softkey The CNC adds a new row to the table and it identifies it with the label ERR indicating that it corresponds to an error To edit or modify the table data use the cursor to select the cell whose value is to be changed and define the data as follows e The number and text of the error are entered directly from the keyboard e The show option and the file for additional information cannot be edited Press ENTER every time a data is edited to accept the new value or ESC to cancel it To delete an error from the table select it with the cursor and press the Delete softkey 11 13 3 Displaying PLC messages When activating a message marks MSG1 through MSG256 the PLC message window top right shows the message number and its associated text Ifthe message has been defined so it shows a file with additional information it will be displayed at full screen if the file does not exist a blue screen will be displayed If ther
56. password is wrong the values cannot be modified and it requests it again every time The test may be executed even when not knowing the access password but the machine parameters cannot be changed The access passwords are determined from the utilities mode Initialize the value of the parameters When turning the CNC on it assumes the new values set by the manufacturer in the CNC tables and or in the drive tables accordingly The values used the last time will be kept for when accessing the test again later Pressing the INITIALIZE softkey sets the values assigned to the parameters as default values in the tables not those set by the manufacturer Bear in mind that the INITIALIZE softkey initializes al the data of the window 13 3 7 Validate the changes and save the configuration used Validate the parameters The new data is assumed by the CNC until the unit is turned off Once the setup is completed the changes must be saved so they can be effective next time the CNC is turned on Use the VALIDATE softkey to save the data The CNC saves the new values in the CNC tables and or in the drive tables accordingly When quitting the circularity test without having saved the parameters the CNC will show a message warning about it and will give a chance to save them Save and load the configuration The system permits saving the current configuration into a file in ASCII format extension TST This file only contains the c
57. set of characters for that other key shown at the top of that key When combined with a letter it writes it in capital letters When combined with arrow keys it selects the text the cursor slides on Alternate characters By keeping it pressed in combination with another key it accesses the third set of character of the that key shown at the bottom right of that key ASCII characters If a number is keyed in while keeping this key pressed it will write the character corresponding to the ASCII code keyed in Capital letters It toggles between uppercase and lowercase letters It only affects alphabetical characters Delete character back space It deletes the character to left of the cursor Deleted character It deletes the character to the right of the cursor or the selected text Insert or overwrite It toggles between insert and overwrite modes When inserting the new text is added to the previous one whereas when overwriting the new text replaces the previous one Tab It moves the cursor to the next field of the active menu Escape key It cancels the current operation without assuming the changes Command validation It is used to validate the data of the current operation and the program blocks edited in editing simulation mode Data recall Having the TEACH IN option active it enters the axis position value into the block being edited When selecting a profile or conversational canned cycle in the p
58. shows the difference between the actual real coordinate obtained from the feedback device and the theoretical coordinate calculated in that point This difference is shown projected radially The interpolation of the machine axes and the point capture for the graphics are initiated separately The data capture is handled from the softkey menu whereas the movement of the axes is controlled from the operator panel g o The adjustment process is repeated until obtaining the best adjustment of the axes The circularity roundness test diagram is an assistance tool that only shows the response of the system to the various settings adjustments it is up to the technician to choose the best adjustment How to execute the circularity roundness test SETUP ASSISTANCE The circularity roundness test Basically it is done as follows Each of these points is described in more detail in the indicated chapter The configuration used may be saved in a file for later 1 Before initiating the process certain aspects must be configured as well as the graphic environment the circular interpolation the values of the parameters involved etc See 13 1 4 Machine parameter editing on page 277 A previously saved configuration may be used 2 Execute a circular interpolation of the machine axes The axes must be moving before the data capture starts See 13 3 4 Define and execute the movement subroutine on page 291 3 Initiate the dat
59. side shows the parameters to be acted upon and the amount to increase decrease the values of those parameters a Oscilloscope SETUP ASSISTANCE Superpuestas KA Selection of the variables to be displayed trigger and time base It is the area where the user selects the variables to be displayed at the graphics window the trigger options and the time base Up to 4 variables may be displayed at the same time When typing the name of any variable incorrectly the CNC will show the error Access denied Besides the trigger data and the base time this window may be used to select the color used to display the variable and whether it will be visible or not Parameter selection and increase decrease It is the area where the user selects the parameters upon which to act To the right of each parameter there is a square used to increase decrease of its value This way when the focus is on the value of a variable on the main screen pressing the vertical softkey V will increase the parameter value in the amount set on the configuration screen By default the increase decrease value of a parameter is initialized to 1 FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 275 SETUP ASSISTANCE GO Oscilloscope FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 276 13 1 3 Configure and execute the oscilloscope function In the oscilloscope mode from a single screen it is possible to select the variables to be analyzed the trig
60. softkey menu This menu may be used to select the length and or radius calibration and whether to calculate their wear or not If the wears are not calculated they are reset to zero after the calibration Tool to be calibrated Tool offset to be calibrated Safety distance Probing feedrate If not defined the movements are carried out at the default feedrate set by the machine manufacturer N Number of cutters of the tool If defined with a 0 value the CNC knows the location of a cutter and it will only make the movement once The spindle turning speed must be 0 If defined with a value other than 0 all cutters will be calibrated The CNC makes an initial movement to locate a cutter then stops the spindle and makes a precise measurement of each cutter It is necessary to define the spindle speed and the Dm distance aro Distance the edge of the tool separates from the center of the probe to position the next cutter Spindle speed Probe side to be touched Behavior when exceeding the maximum wear permitted reject the tool or change it with another one from the same family Maximum length wear allowed Maximum radius wear allowed PRB1MAX_ Probe position oe The values defined here are only taken into account during the PRB2MIN calibration cycle they do not modify the machine parameter values MANUAL JOG MODE TOOL CALIBRATION Automatic calibration with a probe and a canned cycle Ol FAGOR CNC
61. softkey menu offers the option to show the machine data such as FSTD position of the axes feedrate etc This data is shown on the help graphics of the window Selecting a tool In this calibration mode the cycle itself changes the tool and the tool offset There is no need to previously place the tool in the spindle Bear in mind that pressing the CYCLE START key starts the calibration cycle Select another position for the probe The calibration uses the probe position defined in the machine parameters Optionally another position may be defined for the probe which will only be valid for the defined calibration The new position does not affect the values defined in the machine parameters x lt N The data for defining the new probe position is accessed using the vertical softkey menu Tool calibration There are two options for the milling tools and may be selected with the following icons e Calibrate the offsets and resets the wears to zero e Calibrate the length and radius and measure the wears For the lathe tools it calibrates the tool offsets on each axis The offset wears are set to zero Definition of data To define the data place the focus on the relevant data key in the desired value and press ENTER To change icons place the focus on it and press SPACE To calibrate the length radius and wears of a milling tool The data shown depends on the calibration option selected with the horizontal
62. tables The user tables consist of the following tables e Zero offset table e Clamp tables fixtures e Table of arithmetic parameters global local and common In order to activate a fixture zero or part zero offset those values must be previously stored in the relevant CNC table What can you do in this work mode The following operations are possible in this work mode e Edit and modify the tables for zero offsets and parameters e Save the content of a table e Recover the content of a table e Print the content of a table e Initialize a table FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 161 USER TABLES Appearance of the table mode FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 162 8 1 Appearance of the table mode This operating mode consists of several tables The various tables may be selected using the horizontal softkeys Some tables are common to all the channels and others belong to each channel In this case by default they show the ones of the active channel but it is possible to access those of any other channel from the vertical softkey menu The zero offset tables and fixture offset tables are common to all the channels however in each channel they show the axes of that channel When applying an offset in a channel it is only applied to the axes that are part of the channel at the time The tables available are e Zero offset table e Fixture table Table of global parameters There is a table for
63. that it considers best according to the movements programmed Dimensions Edit It is used to manually edit the dimension values It is edited in the graphic window that shows the dimensions of the graphics on each axis Keys for setting the dimensions 0 g To move the cursor through the data To validate and display the set dimensions ESC To cancel the set dimensions 6 5 4 Point of view It is used to select the point of view on 3D graphics The orientation of the graphics may be directly selected at the graphic window by orienting the XY plane and the Z axis The XY plane may be rotated 360 and the Z axis 90 The figure at the lower right hand side of the screen shows the point of view currently selected Keys for selecting the point of view 4 g To orient the XY plane lt e To orient the Z axis oe To validate and display the selected point of view ESC To cancel the selected point point of view When selecting this option the softkey menu shows the options available for selecting the point of view To return to the main menu press the key for the previous menu Point of view Edit It is used to manually edit the orientation of the axes of the graphics It is edited in the dialog area of the graphic window that shows the current orientation of the axes Keys for defining the point of view 2 To move the cursor through the data To validate and display the def
64. the axes will move at the rapid AJN rate set by the machine manufacturer This feedrate will be applied while that key is kept pressed and when released the axes will recover their previous feedrate This rapid rate may be varied between 0 and 200 with the feedrate override switch on the operator panel MANUAL JOG MODE Operations with the axes Yy Incremental JOG In incremental jog the axis moves a specific distance every time the key is pressed In incremental jog the axes may be jogged simultaneously Proceed as follows 1 Turn the jog selector switch of the operator panel to one of the incremental jog positions Each position will move the axis a fixed distance the typical values are the following Selector position Distance 1 0 001 mm or 0 0001 inches 10 0 010 mm or 0 0010 inches 100 0 100 mm or 0 0100 inches 1000 1 000 mm or 0 1000 inches 10000 10 000 mm or 1 0000 inches 2 Jog the desired axis using the JOG panel keypad Every time the JOG panel is acted upon the axis will move the distance indicated on the dial of the jog selector switch If while moving a second axis is selected the new one will move at the same time and under the same conditions FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 69 MANUAL JOG MODE Operations with the axes FAGOR CNC 8070 SoFT V03 0x 70 4 2 3 Jogging the axes with handwheels Up to three electronic handwheels may be used to move the axes Dependi
65. the inside of the unit FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x XIX RELATED DOCUMENTATION Manuals directed to the machine manufacturer or to the person in charge of doing the installation and start up of the CNC Hardware manual It describes the hardware configuration and the technical data of each element Installation Manual It describes how to install and start up the CNC Manuals directed to the end user that is to the CNC operator Operating Manual Describes how to operate the CNC Programming Manual It describes how to program the CNC Examples manual It contains programming examples Other manuals directed to the machine manufacturer and to the end user Manual for New Features It is optional It describes the new features and modifications implemented since the version of the installation operating and programming manuals Error solving manual It offers a description of the error messages that may appear on the CNC indicating the probable causes that originate them and how to solve them FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x GENERAL CONCEPTS This manual describes how to operate with the CNC using the keyboard monitor and the operator panel It also describes the various CNC operating modes as well as how to operate with each of them 1 1 CNC configuration Hardware Monitor keyboard and operator panel The CNC assembly comprises the monitor keyboard and the operator panel e The m
66. the previous menu To define the coordinates of the profile s starting point To define the profile s length along the abscissa axis To define the profile s length along the ordinate axis To define the angle of the profile referred to the abscissa axis To define the direction of the profile clockwise or counterclockwise To accept and draw the defined profile Clockwise arc Counterclockwise arc XY Coordinates of the profile s starting point Lx Ly Length of the profile along both axis tO Angle of the profile with the abscissa axis The data is defined in the data area of the screen where the following information is shown Coordinates of the profile s starting point Profile s length along the abscissa axis Profile s length along the ordinate axis Angle of the profile with the abscissa axis It indicates the direction of the profile 6 9 6 Defining any profile XY Angle Tangency Validate X1 Y1 X2 Y2 ANGLE TANGENCY To define a new profile the CNC request the starting point of the profile Define it with the relevant softkeys and press the Validate softkey The graphic area will show the profile s starting point Once the profile s starting point has been defined the softkey menu will show the necessary options to define the profile To return to the main menu press the key for the previous menu O Straight To edit a straight section O Clockwise arc To edit a clockwise arc O Cou
67. the program or subroutine will be interrupted O Find text To find text in a program O Go to line To position the cursor on a particular line of the program EDITING SIMULATION MODE FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 127 EDITING SIMULATION MODE Program window softkeys FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 128 6 7 Program window softkeys 6 7 1 First block It sets as the first simulation block the block where the cursor is When not setting the first block the simulation will begin at the first block of the program The last block may be selected using the cursor orthe Find text or Go to line options of the softkey menu Keys to move the cursor 1 2 Moves the cursor line by line To move the cursor page by page e Moves the cursor to the first block or to the end of the program The first block defined remains active until canceled with ESC or until the program is simulated in that case the first block of the program will become the first block of the simulation 6 7 2 Stop condition START RESET Itis used to establish in the program or in a subroutine the block where the program simulation will be interrupted After executing that block the simulation may be resumed with the START icon or canceled with the RESET icon If no last block is established the simulation of the program will end after executing one of the end of program functions M02
68. the selected position of the cursors 6 5 6 Clear screen It is used to clear the screen or delete the graphics displayed If a solid graphic type is selected the graphic representation will be reset and it will return to its initial state without machining 6 5 7 Colors It is used to change the colors used in the graphic representation O Path colors When a line graphics is active it will set The color to draw the rapid traverse The color to draw the canned cycles The color to draw the compensated path The color to draw the theoretical path The color to draw the threading The background color of the window O Colors for solids When solid graphics is active it will set The color to draw the outside X The color to draw the inside X The color to draw the outside Y Graphic window softkeys o gt The color to draw the inside Y The color to draw the outside Z EDITING SIMULATION MODE The color to draw the inside Z The background color of the window When selecting this option the softkey menu shows the available options To return to the main menu press the key for the previous menu Colors Apply Itassumes the new colors and applies them to the blocks drawn next If the new colors are not applied the graphics are drawn with the old colors Colors Edit It is used to select the new colors for the graphics They are selected in the dialog area of the graphic window that show the current c
69. tool Information related to the spindle speed S Sreal Actual spindle speed Sprog Programmed speed S Percentage of speed override being applied on to the programmed value Depending on the active screen it will also show the spindle position SPOS and its following error SFWE Information related to the feedrate F of the axes Freal Actual feedrate of the axes Fprog Programmed feedrate F Percentage of feedrate override being applied on to the programmed value Moving mode selected at the jog selector switch on the operator panel Reserved gt MANUAL JOG MODE Appearance of the Manual JOG mode FAGOR CNC 8070 SOFT V03 0x 65 4 1 2 Vertical softkey menu icons Display units millimeters inches Itis used to change the units for displaying the position coordinates of the linear axes and the feedrate data Toggling these units does not affect the rotary axes which will always be displayed in degrees 4 The icon highlights the units currently selected millimeters or inches E It must be borne in mind that the units can only be changed on the data display A program assumes the units defined with the active function G70 or G71 or when not programmed the units set by the machine manufacturer Load zero offset or fixture offset tables It may be used to save the active zero offset in the zero offset or fixture offset table MANUAL JOG MODE Appeara
70. until it touches the part and then validating the calibration on each axis After validating them the new values are saved in the tool table Selecting a tool The tool and the active tool offset may be changed from the calibration mode After defining the new tool or tool offset in the cycle data press CYCLE START and the CNC will execute the tool change Bear in mind that pressing the CYCLE START key in this calibration mode only executes a tool change it does not execute the calibration nor does it validate it Calibration in a mill model i On milling tools the tool length is calibrated and the wear value is set to zero The radius and radius wear may be set manually FAGOR 2 To calculate the length it takes into account the coordinate of the longitudinal axis of the tool in the active plane G17 G18 G19 G20 the tool orientation on the TOOL AX axis and the coordinate of the reference part For the calibration it CNC 8070 assumes that the coordinate of the reference part refers to the longitudinal axis of the tool For the lathe tools it calibrates the tool offsets on each axis The offset wears are set to zero Sort V03 0x 81 MANUAL JOG MODE TOOL CALIBRATION Manual calibration Calibration without a probe FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 82 Calibration in a lathe model For the lathe tools it calibrates the tool offsets on each axis When validating the calibration in one of the offse
71. variables define the error allowed so the result of the function with the calculated value is smaller than E This variable is useful when not knowing what value to assign to N In that case it is recommended to assign to N a very large value and to E the error allowed Calculator HOW TO OPERATE THE CNC FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 29 Keyboard shortcuts HOW TO OPERATE THE CNC FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 30 2 7 Sees oE D m O gt 6 is NSE Keyboard shortcuts Operations at the interface To perform different operations with the CNC CTRL W CTRL J CTRL M CTRL O ALT F4 Work modes Minimize Maximize the CNC Show hide the virtual operator panel Show hide the PLC message list Show hide the CNC message list Turn the CNC off To select the CNC operating modes CTRL A CTRL F6 CTRL F7 CTRL F8 CTRL F9 To show the task window Automatic mode Jog mode MDI mode Editing simulation mode CTRL F10 User tables CTRL F11 Tool and magazine table CTRL F12 Utilities mode CTRL K CNC keys Calculator Same as pressing the following CNC keys CTRL F1 CTRL F2 CTRL F3 CTRL F5 Previous menu Switch window Switch screens RECALL key Same as pressing the following keys of the operator pa
72. 070 Sort V03 0x 35 AUTOMATIC MODE Displaying the automatic mode FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 36 3 1 2 Description of the general status bar The general status bar shows the following information associated with the automatic mode A Program selected in the active channel for execution The background color of the window will be different depending on the program status B Icon showing the status of the program of the active channel The background color will be different depending on the status of the program Program waiting to be executed Background color White Program in execution Background color Green Program interrupted Background color Dark green Program in error aade Background color Red C Number of the block in execution D Active CNC message For each channel it shows the last message activated by the program that is running The window shows the last message of the active channel If there are messages in other channels it will highlight the sign next to the message window To display the list of active messages press the key combination CTRL 0 The list of messages shows nextto each message the channel where itis active E Icon that indicates that the Single block execution mode is active This execution mode is selected from the operator panel 3 1 3 Channel synchronization window The channel synchronization window is ava
73. 0x 228 11 4 6 Customizing It is used for personalizing the appearance and properties of the editing window When selecting this option the softkey menu shows the available options To return to the main menu press the key for the previous menu Customizing Appearance looks It is used for personalizing the look of the different elements of the editing window and the colors of the elements of the program When selecting this option the CNC shows the dialog box with two panels The first one has the elements of the editing window that may be customized and the second one those of the program The panel is selected by the key combination CTRL TAB Set aspect AN GENERAL OPTIONS SINTAX COLORING FONT EDITOR Courier New B ERROR WINDOW e TITLE TATUS BAR i3 Size TEACH IN E KO J Bob TEXT BACK o Text To move the cursor through the elements of the list J To select an option of a group A sea To turn on off the checkboxes C and to open close the drop lists A B After defining the new look use the cursor to select one of the buttons here below to accept or ignore the changes made and press ENTER Cancelar Aplicar Q A To accept the changes and close the dialog box B To ignore the changes and close the dialog box C To apply the changes and close the dialog box The dialog box may also be closed dir
74. 2000 14 42 26 t Archivos de programa G82 Obytes 27 10 2000 12 26 26 W a bin G83 276 bytes 27 09 2000 17 46 14 e S G oceno g ae na O H E FAGOR 7 158 bytes 06 11 2000 18 20 56 W 5 MTB lt 11KB 03 04 2000 15 21 02 e oO TMP 2KB 29 01 2001 08 35 20 lt x T H E uninst 185bytes 18 10 2000 11 12 44 E S USERS ROUNDPAR NC 100 bytes 20 09 2000 16 58 14 w cD E Pocket a B Prg O L E E PROGRAMS Oo B E Profile ke E Reports E RECYCLED H E tmp O H E WINDOWS lt a Microsoft Network ps CYCLE G83 NC hai A Type of file to be selected B Folders accessible from the CNC as well as how they are structured It shows allthe elements accessible from the CNC such as the hard disk floppy disk drive CD ROM unit etc C Files contained in the selected folder D Area to define the name of the new files A file can also be selected when knowing its name Move around in the window Besides the mouse the following keys may be used It switches the window focus With the focus on a folder it closes and opens the submenu of folders To move the focus through the elements of the window To move the focus page by page To move the focus to the beginning or end of the list FAGOR a Opens the selected file CNC 8070 To cancel the selection and close the program listing Sort V03 0x 22 To select a file from the list To make searching easier the file list may be sorted according to different criteria See Sorting
75. 3 Channel synchronization Window cccccceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceaeeeeseeeeeeenaeeeeenaeense 3 1 4 Icon description vertical SOftKEYS ceccceeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeee seas eetcaeeeteeaeeeeeeaeeetaaees 3 2 Data screen ececceseeeeneeeeteeeeees 3 3 Data screen softkeys 3 3 1 First block 3 3 2 StOP CONGILION WPR EEE AET EEE 3 3 3 BOCK SCANCI s sissctes tees fee teeg olecaees ce aer a EE E ES 3 3 4 Find text 3 3 5 3 4 3 5 3 5 1 3 5 2 3 5 3 DIMENSIONS siiicestietieieiva tiled niece av hidden 3 5 4 POIROT VIQW AEEA ETET ET E E ATTE 3 5 5 MGASUIEMEN ceccccveccctieciacescsentieretincaccantiasiteeaccwericcitedas cavern cateacat ian tnateecneteacieateees 3 5 6 Clear SOBEN wacccssciiccss scescecctsscssssscuccuasesses cctcecacecittasssceaseceezctzsaceseaesseisseeeataraaevesacs 3 5 7 Colors 3 5 8 OPONSE risanata anana ae e Ee anA Ea EEA E E aI rrr ner errr tire tr ee 55 3 5 9 Real COOrdINAtES NEE TET 56 3 6 Program selection and execution sesssessseeesssssitserriseernstrinnsrnnnestnssnnansnnnssnnnsnnt 57 3 6 1 Programi SEIC OM isisi eair u eaS ESAE EEAS Ead AREEN AEAEE EIE TENTEN 57 3 6 2 ProgrameX CUtON siiis iraidd da 58 3 6 3 TOO INSPOCHION s iiss csssescesasecessess cescceceesvesee cess caazeescccdeecacsereaicadeccautecaccessecnnaacgeczeses cs 59 3 6 4 Block search and program CXeCUTION cccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeteeeetaeaeteneeeeeaee 61 MANUAL JOG MODE 4 1 Appearan
76. 319 h DIAGNOSIS O1 Sercos diagnosis FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 320 15 3 Sercos diagnosis General information about the bus General purpose it shows the following information about the Sercos bus Version SERCON chip version Loop time Time between two synchronization messages MST It is the same as general parameter LOOPTIME T2 Time from the MST until the CNC starts sending the telegram with the position commands MDT T3 Time from the MST until the drives have the position commands T4 Time from the MST when the drives read the feedback values TL Time from the MST until the RT IT takes place at the CNC Distortion errors Distortion error counter at the CNC Ring errors Sercos ring error counter Phase Current Sercos phase Phase status Phase status 0 OK Logic ID and name Name and drivelD number of the rotary switch of the Sercos axes General information about the bus It shows the following information for each drive General information Ti Time from the MST until the drive starts sending its telegram AT Control word Contents of the drive s control word Status word Contents of the drive s status word Name Name of the Sercos axis Error information Reset Hard counter Number of times that the drive has been reset Distortion errors Counter of distortion errors detected at the drive AT errors Counters of AT reception errors of each drive Information on the last operatio
77. 70 Sort V03 0x 185 2 O O Operating manual Tool table TOOL AND MAGAZINE TABLE FAGOR CNC 8070 SoFT V03 0x 186 B Cutter width This data is only shown for turning tools Cutter angle Cutting angle Cutter width Cutting length Rp Tool tip radius Tool tip radius RpW Tool tip radius wear Tool tip radius wear The CNC will add this value to the nominal tool tip radius to calculate the actual real tool tip radius Rp Rp wear Le Cutting length Length of the cutting edge Ae Entry angle This data is only shown on tools that are not for turning Penetration angle for pocket milling Tool offsets On milling tools it is used to define the tool position when using a tool holder or an intermediate tooling On turning tools it is used to define the tool length in each axis Tool offset wear Tool offset distance Tool life monitoring This group shows the data related to tool life monitoring If a tool has been defined with several offsets it is possible to manage the status of each one When managing the live of two or more offsets of the same tool the list of the magazine positions magazine table only shows whether the tool has been rejected or not Type It is used to activate and select the type of tool life monitoring in time or number of operations Nominal life Machining time in minutes or number of operations that the tool may carr
78. 8070 Sort V03 0x 87 MANUAL JOG MODE TOOL CALIBRATION Automatic calibration with a probe and a canned cycle FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 88 To calibrate the offsets of a milling or lathe tool Tool to be calibrated ID Tool offset to be calibrated Safety distance Probing feedrate If not defined the movements are carried out at the default feedrate set by the machine manufacturer PRB1MAX Probe position Eo The values defined here are only taken into account during the PRB2MIN calibration cycle they do not modify the machine parameter values This icon sets the number of axes to calibrate on Tool calibration steps To calibrate the length follow these steps 1 Select the tool and the offset to be calibrated It is not necessary to insert the tool into the spindle the CNC carries out this operation if necessary 2 Define the data defining the calibration To calibrate a milling tool use the horizontal softkey menu to select the desired operation 3 Press the CYCLE START key to start the calibration The CNC calibrates the tool making all the necessary movements there is no need to manually approach the tool If necessary the CNC makes the tool change 4 After the calibration It updates the tool table data 5 3 2 Lathe model plane geometrical configuration This option is only available when using a tabletop probe installed on the machine This mode may be used to calibrat
79. AGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 152 7 1 Appearance of the MDI mode When this operating mode is active it will be indicated at the top right side of the general status bar This mode may be displayed with several screens The current screen and the total number of available screens are shown at the upper right hand side of the general status bar Switching between the different screens is done by pressing the MDI mode accessing key The screen selection is rotary in such a way that when pressing this key on the last screen it shows the first one of the operating mode Standard configuration The standard configuration of this work mode described in this manual corresponds to the one supplied by Fagor In some cases the manual shows a sample screen instead of that of the CNC in order to make it easier to understand These screens may be customized by the machine manufacturer changing its contents as well as its appearance They may also remove certain screens or add some of their own 7 1 1 Window description As mentioned earlier the MDI mode may be displayed with two different windows later sections of this chapter describe how to use them Standard window The standard window only displays one edit line for editing new blocks Sas T 000000001 D 0i NxTool 000000000 MDI MODE Appearance of the MDI mode Sreal Sprog S Freal Fprog A Window for the MDI mode Editing line Full scr
80. AUTOMATIC MODE Graphic screen softkeys FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 50 3 5 2 Zoom To enlarge or reduce the whole graph shown or part of it This option is not available in the Combined type of graphics After selecting the zoom option a zoom frame will appear over the graphics This frame may be enlarged reduced and moved around over the graphics already displayed in order to select a particular portion of it to zoom into or out of Keys for selecting the zoom To move the zoom frame around is To change the size of the zoom frame To validate and display the selected zoom area The graphics at the lower right hand side of the screen shows two figures The one shown with lines only indicates the dimensions of the display area and the one with colored sides indicates the portion selected with the zoom When selecting this option the softkey menu shows the available zoom options To return to the main menu press the key for the previous menu Zoom Initial Restores the size of the display are set via program or using the Dimensions option Zoom Automatic The CNC uses the zoom that it considers best according to the movements programmed Zoom Previous It displays up to two zooms defined earlier After the second one it shows again the one defined last Zoom Limits Only forthe Sections type In this graphics zooming is done by moving the indicators that appear frami
81. B Machine Tool Builder direCtory ieee eee cies cesses teeeeeeeneeeeees 11 1 4 2 SERS GirGClOny castacccsrzesceteustestancsheceshessectanedacditdatsoduncsanetaes cocacasitaassdevosaaaneest Ganuad 12 HOW TO OPERATE THE CNC 2 1 Soren GESCHIPLION wascicccsccccestetsesvetescaeendecaedtesanerestneazedsaatssinecetiveadensetsvatedacetecdscizecaees 13 2 1 1 Detailed description of the CNC status Dat c ccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee sees eeteteeeeeaee 14 2 2 Operating modes 2 2 1 How to access to the operating MOdES ccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeteeeee setters eteaeeeteeeeeaee 16 2 2 2 Description of the various Operating Modes cceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeaeeeeeaeeneeees 18 2 3 Dialog DOX S ienaa ea cede edie aaaea aa aa SA Sie EATA a aA aS 20 2 4 Windows for warnings and errors c cceeceeeceeeeeee cee eeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeenaeeeeseeees 21 2 5 File selection window 2 6 CAICUIAION sccscccicccesssss sccceseeccsssesceasceveassasacsccseace creatzcccsscuetesarasesescecsiatevateaseaaniieesissssecs 2 6 1 Defining ExpPreSSiONns ccccececeecceeeeeeceeeeeeeceesaeeeseaaeeeseaeeesecaeeeeeeaeeetaeaeeeeeaeeeeaes 27 2 7 Keyboard Shortcuts su aii aaa sas ara rA a A Ea a 30 AUTOMATIC MODE 3 1 Displaying the automatic mode sesssssssessiseesssrsitsesinestnnnrinnsnnnntsnnnnnnnnnnnnsnnnnsnnt 3 1 1 Description of th SCrEONS osterea eaii iaa 3 1 2 Description of the general status bar 3 1
82. C 8070 SOFT V03 0x Screen description HOW TO OPERATE THE CNC FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 14 2 1 1 Detailed description of the CNC status bar The top of the screen shows the following information A Icon customizable identifying the manufacturer B Icon showing the status of the program of the active channel The background color will be different depending on the status of the program K D K Programmed stopped Program in execution Background color Green Program interrupted Background color Dark green Program in error Background color Red C Program selected in the active channel for execution The background color will be different depending on the status of the program D Number of the block in execution The bottom icon indicates that the Single block execution mode is active E Information about the channels Number of channels available and active channel indicated in blue Icons show which operating mode each channel is in E wW D Execution mode Jog mode MDI mode The channel synchronization window may be expanded using the ALT S keys The synchronization is carried out using marks in the programs The window shows for each channel whether it is waiting for synchronization marks or not and the status of those marks in the channel that originates them An LED of various colors of the window show the status of the synchroni
83. C 8070 SoFT V03 0x 110 6 3 8 Canned cycles It is used to access the conversational canned cycles When selecting this option the softkey menu shows the available canned cycles To return to the main menu press the key for the previous menu When selecting acanned cycle the CNC displays the window for defining that canned cycle Some of these canned cycles may be associated with multiple machining so it is repeated at all points Geometry o o o DRILLING rs gf 2 PJ Machining if 5 z F 2 x O75 wm 5 N 2 The cycle defining window may also be accessed by selecting a canned cycle in the program and pressing RECALL The cycle being edited may also be simulated in the window for defining the conversational canned cycle The programming manual offers a more detailed description of how to define and or simulate conversational canned cycles O O O Operating manual 6 3 9 TEACH IN ON TEACH IN OFF It is used to activate or deactivate the TEACH IN mode in this mode the axes may be moved manually and their position may be assigned to a block When active the top of the editing window shows the position of the axes defined as visible for the TEACH IN mode See 6 3 6 Customizing on page 107 G40 X 30 Y 30 EXAMPLE PROGRAM 1000 M3 GOO X 30 Y 30 z10 G01 Z 10 F300 G42 X30 Y30 F650 G37 I20 x70 Y70 x30 30 G38 120 X 30 30 2Z 20 F300 X20 Y20 F650
84. C resulting from any hardware manipulation by personnel unauthorized by Fagor Automation If the CNC hardware is modified by personnel unauthorized by Fagor Automation it will no longer be under warranty COMPUTER VIRUSES FAGOR AUTOMATION guarantees that the software installed contains no computer viruses It is up to the user to keep the unit virus free in order to guarantee its proper operation Computer viruses at the CNC may cause it to malfunction An antivirus software is highly recommended if the CNC is connected directly to another PC itis part of acomputer network or floppy disks or other computer media is used to transmit data FAGOR AUTOMATION shall not be held responsible for any personal injuries or physical damage caused or suffered by the CNC due a computer virus in the system If a computer virus is found in the system the unit will no longer be under warranty CHAPTER 1 CHAPTER 2 CHAPTER 3 CHAPTER 4 INDEX GENERAL CONCEPTS 1 1 CNC configuration HardWare cssssissississiiririi iaiia aada 1 1 2 Turning the CNC on and off E 1 2 1 Emergency shutdown with battery a 1 3 Description of the keys cececeeseceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeee eo 1 3 1 Keys associated with the information on the Screen cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeteeees 5 1 3 2 KeybOard lAYOUL sssrinin ina 6 1 3 3 Description of the operator panel 8 1 4 Directory structure 0 cceeeee 10 1 4 1 MT
85. FAGOR REF 0509 SOFT V03 0x OPERATING MANUAL Soft VO3 0x Ref 0509 FAGOR 2 Unauthorized copying or distributing of this software is prohibited All rights reserved No part of this documentation may be transmitted transcribed stored in a backup device or translated into another language without Fagor Automation s consent Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation U S A PRELIMINARY WARNINGS A MACHINE SAFETY Itis up to the machine manufacturer to make sure that the safety of the machine is enabled in order to prevent personal injury and damage to the CNC or to the products connected to it On start up and while validating CNC parameters it checks the status of the following safety elements e Feedback alarm for analog axes e Software limits for analog and sercos linear axes Following error monitoring for analog and sercos axes except the spindle both at the CNC and at the drives e Tendency test on analog axes If any of them is disabled the CNC shows a warning message and it must be enabled to guarantee a safe working environment FAGOR AUTOMATION shall not be held responsible for any personal injuries or physical damage caused or suffered by the CNC resulting from any of the safety elements being disabled HARDWARE EXPANSIONS FAGOR AUTOMATION shall not be held responsible for any personal injuries or physical damage caused or suffered by the CN
86. ILITIES MODE Utilities mode selection The utilities mode may be accessed from any other operating mode even while a program is in execution by pressing the relevant key Operations in this work mode This work mode shows the files that may be accessed from the CNC and may be used for the following operations See the files stored at the CNC in a floppy disk or at another CNC or PC connected via Ethernet Create new folders to save files Select a file group and carry out operations such as copy rename or delete files Change file attributes Do a file search based on a text already defined in them Set a password to restrict the access to the customizing tool FGUIM to machine parameters and to the PLC Make or restore a backup copy of the CNC data FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 203 UTILITIES MODE Appearance of the utilities mode FAGOR CNC 8070 SoFT V03 0x 204 10 1 Appearance of the utilities mode When this operating mode is active it will be indicated at the top right side of the general status bar This mode only has one screen Standard configuration The standard configuration of this work mode described in this manual corresponds to the one supplied by Fagor In some cases the manual shows a sample screen instead of that of the CNC in order to make it easier to understand 2 O O Operating manual 10 1 1 Screen description The utilities mode screen shows the following i
87. INE TABLE The left panel shows the list of available tools For each tool it indicates the position and the magazine where it is located whether it is a ground tool or the tool is active in a channel The right panel shows the data of the tool selected on the list From the vertical softkey menu it is possible to select the data shown on the right panel See 9 2 3 Description of the tool data on page 181 About the tools Each tool is identified by its number that is unique for the whole system it cannot be repeated in different magazines nor in ground tools This table indicates the position and the magazine where each tool is located whether it is a ground tool or the tool is active in a channel Ground tools A ground tool is a tool that is not stored in any magazine and is loaded manually when requested Ground tools are also defined in the tool table but they are not associated with any magazine position Ground tool loading and unloading is global to the system it is not associated with any particular magazine or channel FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x ara Tool table TOOL AND MAGAZINE TABLE FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 178 9 2 1 Description of the icons of the vertical softkey menu m gt S x lt i The options of the vertical menuof softkeys depend on which table is active The vertical softkey menu shows all the options for the selected table
88. It is in one of the spindles a M1 M4 It is in one of the magazines In this case it also indicates its 2 magazine position CH1 CH2 It is in the holders of the tool changer arm If none of these positions is indicated it means that it is a ground tool Ground tools are not stored in the magazine and are loaded manually when requested How to move around on the tool list Keys to select a tool from the list To scroll list up and down line by line To move the cursor page by page through the list B joe To move the cursor to the beginning or end of the list ENTER To access the data of the selected tool FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 180 9 2 3 Description of the tool data The tool data appears on the right panel of the tool table It shows the data of the tool selected on the list This data must be defined by the user When using tool life monitoring the CNC is in charge of updating the value of the actual real life Configuring the tool data display The data being shown may be configured from the vertical softkey menu When pressing this icon the CNC shows a dialog box for selecting the data to be shown To hide a data cancel the relevant check box Tool table O m Keys to set the tool table 4 1 To move the cursor SPACE To activate deactivate the selection box To accept the configuration defined ESC To cancel the defined configurat
89. L OF THE POSITION SELECTED ON THE LIST STATUS W 2 elie SMAI bic SPECIAL M 0 I 0 M MAGAZINE DATA A Magazine positions B Magazine information The table is divided in two panels The left panel shows the list of magazine positions For each position it indicates whether it is free disabled or has a tool For each tool it shows the remaining life time when using tool life monitoring and the family it belongs to The right panel is informative only it cannot be selected This panel shows information about the magazine status about the tools in the tool changer arm and about the tool selected on the list Optionally it may show information on the type and configuration of the magazine Magazine table TOOL AND MAGAZINE TABLE FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x Magazine table TOOL AND MAGAZINE TABLE FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 194 9 6 1 Description of the icons of the vertical softkey menu i PA ay The options of the vertical menuof softkeys depend on which table is active The vertical softkey menu shows all the options for the selected table The group of options shown on this menu may be expanded with the softkey associated with the icon that offers a different set of options The options shown for the tool table are Load unload a tool to from the tool changer arm This icon is only available in magazines with tool change
90. NC PRG EXAMPLE P Program selected for time estimate The process to estimate time is the following 1 Use the program window to select the first and last block for the execution time estimate If not selected the execution time estimate will be done from the first block of the program to the execution of one of the end of program functions M02 or M30 2 Activate the desired simulation options using the icon menu 3 Start the estimate calculation by pressing its TIMES icon Simulation options These options may also be turned on or off while simulating the program When they are active its corresponding icon of the icon menu will appear pressed The simulation options available are Single block mode It selects the single block mode so the execution time calculation is interrupted at the end of each block Block jump It simulates the external block skip switch When active the CNC will NOT calculate the execution time of the blocks containing the block skip character Statistics window e gt E EDITING SIMULATION MODE FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 133 Profile editor EDITING SIMULATION MODE FAGOR 2 l CNC 8070 SoFT V03 0x 134 6 9 Profile editor The profile editor looks like this A Graphic area Graphic representation of the profile being drawn B Displayed area It indicates the size of the graphic area It is given by the maximum and minimum co
91. NER option End of editing FAGOR Select the END option and save the profile The CNC quits the profile editor and inserts the profile in the part program CNC 8070 SoFT V03 0x 148 6 9 12 Profile editor Example 2 Profile editor E W QA O Q lt a 0 zZ E A Definition of a profile without rounding Ba Starting point X 100 Y 20 Straight X 80 Y 20 Straight X 80 Angle 90 Counterclockwise 1 Center X 75 Radius 5 Tangency Yes arc Counterclockwise 2 Center X 100 Radius 150 Tangency Yes arc Clockwise arc Center X 40 Center Y 80 Radius 20 Tangency Yes The CNC shows the options for section 2 Select the correct one The CNC shows the options for section 1 Select the correct one Clockwise arc 3 Radius 200 Tangency Yes Clockwise arc Center X 80 Center Y 160 Radius 10 Tangency Yes The CNC shows the options for section 3 Select the correct one Counterclockwise 4 Radius 40 Tangency Yes arc Clockwise arc Center X 120 Center Y 160 Radius 10 Tangency Yes The CNC shows the options for section 4 Select the correct one Clockwise arc 5 Radius 200 Tangency Yes Clockwise arc Center X 160 Center Y 80 Radius 20 Tangency Yes The CNC shows the options for section 5 Select the correct one Counterclockwise 6 Center X 100 Radius 150 Tangency Yes arc The CNC shows the options for section 6 Select the correct one Coun
92. OOFF MPA SERVOOFF set axis Immediate MINANOUT MPA MINAOUT set axis Immediate BAKANOUT PP2 MPA BAKANOUT set axis Immediate BAKTIME PP3 MPA BAKTIME set axis Immediate If the machine parameters are protected when accessing any of them the CNC will display a window requesting a password a o Oscilloscope SETUP ASSISTANCE FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 277 SETUP ASSISTANCE GO Oscilloscope FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 278 Variables that may be modified at the Sercos drive Drive Name Update CP1 CP1 axis Immediate CP2 CP2 axis Immediate CP3 CP3 axis Immediate CP30 CP30 set axis Immediate CP31 CP31 set axis Immediate CP32 CP32 set axis Immediate NP1 NP1 axis Immediate RP1 RP1 axis Immediate RP2 RP2 axis Immediate RP3 RP3 axis Immediate RP4 RP4 axis Immediate RP51 RP51 axis Immediate RP52 RP52 axis Immediate RP53 RP53 axis Immediate RP54 RP54 axis Immediate SP1 SP 1 set axis Immediate SP2 SP2 set axis Immediate SP50 SP50 axis Immediate SP51 SP51 axis Immediate TP10 TP10 axis Immediate TP11 TP11 axis Immediate TP12 TP12 axis Immediate TP13 TP13 axis Immediate TP14 TP14 axis Immediate Besides the parameters shown in the previous table the user may access any variable having a writing permission if he knows its name To do this use the following nomenclature Indicate the axis the
93. SC key Define the search criteria Every time one of these icons is pressed it shows a dialog box to define the search criteria The following may be defined in this dialog box TOOL AND MAGAZINE TABLE Showing tables and common operations e The text or value to search for e The beginning point of the search namely either from the beginning of the table or from the cursor position Find text FIND TEXT TEXT START BEGINNING C CURSOR To move the cursor through the elements of the list It selects an option from a group ENTER To start the search ESC To cancel the search and close the dialog box FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 173 9 1 3 Save and load the tables From the vertical softkey menu it is possible to make a backup copy of the table data recommended With these files it is possible to recover the table data when needed These tables are saved in the an ASCII file These files may be saved at the CNC in a floppy disk or at another device CNC PC etc connected through Ethernet By default they are saved in the folder C CNC8070 MTB DATA orin the last folder selected by the user 9 These tables are saved in the following files The table monitoring the change L processes is informative only it is not copied anywhere Table File Tool table Tools TPT Active tools table Toolsact TPA Tool magazine table if there is only one
94. T V03 0x 212 10 2 4 Select all It selects all the files of the list The selection will be canceled by moving the cursor To add or remove a file from the selection keep the CTRL key pressed and place the cursor on the file and press SPACE key Keys to select a folder i To move the cursor thru the elements of the window ei 5 To move the cursor page by page To move the cursor to the beginning or end of the list Having selected a group of files they may be deleted copied cut or their attributes may be changed by pressing the relevant icon Invert selection It inverts the file selection made selecting the files that appeared unselected and vice versa To add or remove a file from the selection keep the CTRL key pressed and place the cursor on the file and press SPACE key Keys to select a folder To move the cursor thru the elements of the window To move the cursor page by page B nUe To move the cursor to the beginning or end of the list Having selected a group of files they may be deleted copied cut or their attributes may be changed by pressing the relevant icon 10 2 6 New folder It is used to create a new folder to store files When selecting this option the CNC shows a dialog box requesting the file name Write the new name and select one of the buttons to accept it or ignore it Keys to select a folder To move t
95. T V03 0x 256 12 1 Appearance of the machine parameter tables When this mode is active it will be indicated at the top right side of the general status bar This operating mode consists of several tables The various tables may be selected using the horizontal softkeys If while one of the tables is selected the previous menu key is pressed that table will be deselected The available machine parameter tables are General parameters Axis and spindle parameters Jog parameters Parameters related to the M functions Parameters for kinetics Parameters for the magazines HMI parameters OEM parameters Standard configuration The standard configuration of this work mode described in this manual corresponds to the one supplied by Fagor In some cases the manual shows a sample screen instead of that of the CNC in order to make it easier to understand g N MACHINE PARAMETERS Appearance of the machine parameter tables FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 257 MACHINE PARAMETERS N Appearance of the machine parameter tables FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 258 12 1 1 Icon description vertical softkeys E H in The icons are activated with their associated softkey F8 to F12 The icon menu offers all the options for the selected table The group of icons of this menu may be expanded with the softkey associated with the icon that offers a new set of icons L
96. TABLE FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 183 Tool table TOOL AND MAGAZINE TABLE FAGOR CNC 8070 SoFT V03 0x 184 Operation Tool type Turning gt A Diamond B Square B C C Round Surface milling A Surface milling endmill Tapping A Cutter B Tap TIT Measuring probe Others To define the tools that do are not suitable for the proposed operations Axis orientation in turning It is defined with an icon that is only displayed when defining a turning lathe tool The orientation of the axes is determined by the type of lathe horizontal or vertical the position of the turret and the spindle position on the right or on the left Location code or tool calibration point It is defined with an icon that is only displayed when defining a turning lathe tool The location code indicates which is the calibrated tool tip and therefore the point controlled by the CNC to apply radius compensation The location code depends on the orientation of the machine axes Tool holder orientation It is defined by an icon that is displayed in the following cases e Ona lathe model for all the tools e Ona mill model only for turning lathe tools The orientation of the tool holder indicates whether it is a tool for horizontal or radial machining For turning tools the meaning of this icon depends on the orientation of the tool axes Horizontal lathe Radial machining
97. TING SIMULATION MODE FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 98 Softkey menu of the editing window When selecting the editing window the horizontal softkey menu shows the options for this window The set of options offered by this menu may be changed using the softkey which offers a new set of options The options available in the softkey menu are the following See 6 3 Editing window softkeys on page 102 O Open program To select a program for the editing simulation mode O File To restore save save with another name or print a program It can also be used to import the contents of another program of a DXF file or PIM and PIT files O Undo To undo the last modifications made O Operations with blocks To copy cut and paste information of a block or set of blocks within the program It can also copy a block or set of blocks as an independent program O Find replace To search for a line or text in the program being edited It can also replace a text with another text O Customize To customize the appearance and the properties of the editing window O Profile editor To access the profile editor and define a new profile or modify an existing one O Cycle editor To access the conversational editor for machining and positioning canned cycles O TEACH IN ON TEACH IN OFF To turn on or off the TEACH IN mode 6 2 1 Program editing The process of editing or modifying a program is the following
98. The user selects the variables and parameters to be monitored VARIABLE VALUE GV25 5 GV25 GV26 5 GV26 The command bar is located at the bottom of the window See 14 3 Command bar on page 302 List of variables or parameters The ADD softkey shows a window where one can select the variables or parameters to be monitored and they will be shown on the screen Variables and parameters of any drive may be selected Use the INITIALIZE softkey to clear the whole list To delete a variable or parameter from the list select it and press the DEL key The SAVE softkey saves the list into a file and theLOAD softkey restores the list from a file Monitoring the status of variables or parameters Press the START softkey of the horizontal menu to start monitoring Press the STOP softkey to stop monitoring 14 8 Information service Gl This service monitors two types of information It shows the status of the operation being carried out atthe drive on the other hand it shows the status of the digital inputs and outputs of the drive The command bar is located at the bottom of the window See 14 3 Command bar on page 302 Monitoring the status of the operations of the drive The OPERATION STATUSSoftkey of the horizontal menu gives access to this option T gt Tx T gt TLimit Velocity Feedback gt Min Velocity Feedback gt Nx Velocity Feedback Velocity Command Velo
99. Users Reports bmp When selecting this option the CNC will show a dialog box requesting the print destination printer or file Print destination SELECT PRINT DESTINATION x PRINTER lt To select the print destination To print the drawing ESC To cancel the printing After selecting the destination press ENTER to print it or ESC to cancel it FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 124 6 5 9 Speed Option Print setup It is used to set the printing configuration When selecting this option the CNC shows a dialog box where the following may be defined A The title of the graphics that will appear next to it in the print B The name of the file where the graphics will be stored when printing out to a file Print configuration Print Configuration x A TITLE EXAMPLE FILE CNCBO7DUSERS Reparts Graphics bmp Cance To move the cursor through the elements of the list To accept the configuration defined To cancel the defined configuration After filling out the data press ENTER to accept them or ESC to cancel them To change the simulation speed When selecting this option the softkey menu shows the options to set the simulation speed To return to the main menu press the key for the previous menu Speed Edit It is used to select the new simulation speed It is selected using the graduated ruler that indicates the active simul
100. a capture and the graphic simulation Once the axes are moving the data capture for the graphics may begin While capturing data the position error at each point is drawn on the graphics See 13 3 5 Data capture for the graphic on page 292 4 Optimize the adjustment by changing some machine parameters of the CNC or of the drive This makes it possible to evaluate the system response to these changes and optimize the adjustment See 13 3 6 Adjustment of the machine parameters involved on page 293 5 Save the modified values and the configuration used See 13 3 7 Validate the changes and save the configuration used on page 295 Move through the data To enter or modify a data it must be selected i e it must have the editing focus on it To select a data use the keys The data are accepted with the ENTER key Before accepting a data it is checked out and if the data is not correct it is not accepted FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 289 13 uw D O g ze lt 3 n 2 o 5 Q gt gt e W ns 2 O o H FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 290 13 3 3 Configure the graphic environment This operation may be carried out before or during the test If they are modified during the test the screen is cleared and the graphic representation goes on The following graphic characteristics may be defined from the data window e Number of divisions on both sides of the theoretica
101. added to the history whereas if it is modified block it will replace the previous one in the history Block execution The block on the edit line is executed by pressing START at the operator panel Once the block has been executed is saved in the block history The STOP key interrupts the execution of the block Press START again to resume execution from where it was interrupted The RESET key cancels the execution of the block and resets the CNC to its initial conditions 7 3 2 Save the blocks as a program To save the block history as an independent program press the Save softkey and the CNC will show a list of the programs saved at the CNC Keys for selecting a block from history To switch windows To move the cursor thru the elements of the window To save the new program To cancel the selection and close the program listing ESC To save the program 1 Write the program name in the bottom window To replace an existing program select it from the list 2 Press ENTER to save the program or ESC to return to the MDI mode without saving the program N MDI MODE Full MDI screen FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 159 2 O O Operating manual MDI MODE Full MDI screen FAGOR CNC 8070 SOFT V03 0x USER TABLES User table selection The CNC tables may be accessed from any other operating mode even while a program is in execution by pressing the key for these
102. ade SH Profile editor O Save and continue To save the profile and continue editing Using this key does not require that the profile be completed EDITING SIMULATION MODE If the profile has been resolved the CNC will insert it in the part program that is being edited If the profile cannot be resolved due to lack of data the CNC will issue the relevant message FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 135 Profile editor EDITING SIMULATION MODE FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 136 6 9 1 Operating procedure Several profiles may be edited without having to exit the profile editor To edit a profile proceed as follows 1 Select the type of profile to be edited such as a circular or rectangular profile or any profile For a rectangular or circular profile define its data and insert it For any profile first select the starting point of the profile Once the first point has been selected draw the profile which will be made up of straight and curved sections If it has corner rounding chamfering or tangential entries and exits use one of these methods e Treat them as individual sections when having enough information to define them e Ignore them while defining the profile and once it has been defined select the corners that have those characteristics and insert them End the profile editing session by inserting them into the program The portion of ISO code program corresponding to
103. after every change e If Manual save is active it is up to the operator to save the program See 6 3 2 File on page 103 Editing window softkeys EDITING SIMULATION MODE FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 107 EDITING SIMULATION MODE Editing window softkeys FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 108 Customizing Autonumbering ON Autonumbering OFF It is used to turn on off the autonumbering of the blocks While autonumbering is active the CNC will insert the block number automatically every time a new block is generated Customizing Autonumbering parameters It is used for selecting the starting block number and the sequencing step for the following blocks when autonumbering the blocks When selecting this option the CNC shows a dialog box requesting both data After defining these values press ENTER to accept them or ESC to ignore them Customizing TEACH IN parameters It may be used to set the behavior of each axis in TEACH IN mode The behavior of an axis is defined by the properties visible and selected Visible The axis is displayed in the TEACH IN window Selected The axis is included in the blocks that are edited by pressing the RECALL key Depending on these properties one of the following behaviors may be assigned to the axes e Selected and visible The axis is displayed in the TEACH IN window anditis included in the blocks being edited by pressing the RECALL
104. ains no folders and they are not shown here It contains folders and they are shown here UTILITIES MODE The folder has been selected To select a folder from the list e Move the cursor with the relevant keys Appearance of the utilities mode e Using the alphanumeric keyboard pressing a key will select the first element starting with that letter Pressing it again will select the second one and so on Keys to select a folder To switch windows folders or files To close and open a folder submenu To move the cursor page by page gt g To move the cursor thru the elements of the window end home TO Move the cursor to the beginning or end of the list When selecting a folder the CNC shows a list of the files it contains See the 10 2 2 Options section of this chapter Likewise the bottom of the window will show the number of files contained in the folder and the total size bytes they amount to List of files This window shows the files stored in the selected folder Any of them may be deleted renamed its protections changed and copied within the same device CNC PC floppy disk or between two different devices This window offers the following information e The fil FAGOR e file name e The file size in bytes e The time and date when the file was edited last CNC 8070 e The attributes of the file Sort V03 0x 206 Attributes Mod
105. al 14 1 1 Screen description The DDSSetup screen shows the following information DRIVES DESCRIPTION VERSION v06 08 AXIS BETA Apr 6 2005 MOTOR FXM12 40A E1 000 DRIVE A gt zk gt DDSSETUP Appearance of the DDSSetup mode A Title bar that shows the name of the active service B Main window C Command bar FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x DDSSETUP F Appearance of the DDSSetup mode FAGOR CNC 8070 SoFT V03 0x 300 14 1 2 Vertical softkey menu icons J Opn List of drives Shows the list of Sercos drives connected to the CNC It shows a short description of each drive Drive accessing level change Change the access level for drive parameters and variables This softkey shows a window that requests the password to quit the basic level and access a new level Parameters and variables service Shows the list of parameters and variables of the drive You may choose whether to show the list of parameters the list of variables or both Error management service It shows the list of errors detected by the drive The errors are shown in the order they come up It is also possible to disable some errors Monitoring service It shows a list of variables that are selected by the user Information ser
106. al softkeys R The icon menu offers all the icons associated with this operating mode regardless of the active screen The icons are activated with their associated softkey F8 to F12 List of icons Program selection It selects a program for execution Begin tool inspection This icon is only available when program execution is interrupted To begin tool inspection in order to check its condition While tool inspection is active the axes may be jogged and the spindle may be started or stopped End tool inspection This icon is only available when tool inspection is active It ends tool inspection 3 2 Data screen A typical screen of the automatic mode can show the following information EXAMPLE T 000000001 D 01 E NxTool 000000000 Sreal 00000 Sprog 00000 F S 100 Freal 00000 Fprog 00000 F 100 CyTime 0 00 00 00 Partc 0000 H A Program window It shows data on the program selected for execution and lets selecting the initial and final execution blocks It shows the following data e Name ofthe program or global subroutine called upon from the program that is being executed e Blocks of the program or subroutine being executed During execution the cursor shows the block being executed When accessing the automatic mode and after finishing the execution of the program it shows the portion of the main program even if there are local subroutines defined in the prog
107. amp zero if active To apply an absolute zero offset it must be activated via program using the relevant function USER TABLES Zero offset tables FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x O O O Operating manual USER TABLES Fixture table FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 8 3 Fixture table This table stores the clamp offsets for each axis There are up to 10 clamp offsets Although the table is common to all the channels when accessing from a channel itonly shows the axes of that channel The offsets of other channels may be accessed from the vertical softkey menu FIXTURE OFFSETS 00000 000 00000 000 00000 000 00000 000 00000 000 00000 000 mi o0000 000 00000 00 00000 000 00000 000 00000 000 00000 000 00000 000 00000 000 00000 000 00000 000 o0000 000 00000 000 00000 000 00000 000 00000 000 00000 000 00000 000 00000 000 00000 000 00000 000 00000 000 00000 000 00000 000 00000 O 00000 000 00000 000 00000 000 00000 oos 00000 000 l 00000 000 00000 000 00000 000 00000 000 00000 000 A Machine axes and display units millimeters inches or degrees B Clamp offset C Clamp offset value in each axes of the channel The end of this chapter describes how to edit this table Fixture offset Besides setting the values directly in the table they may also be set from the PLC or via part program using high level variables The clamp offsets are used to set the pos
108. ane trihedron geometrical configuration the CNC will also show its data and calibration will be possible on that axis The data of the third axis may be hidden or shown using the horizontal softkey menu For a milling tool Coordinate of the reference part being used in the calibration This coordinate is referred to the longitudinal axis of the tool Tool to be calibrated ie Tool offset to be calibrated Tool calibration steps To calibrate the length follow these steps 1 Define the dimensions of the reference part being used in the calibration 2 Select the tool and the offset to be calibrated After the selection the CNC shows the dimensions defined in the tool table for that offset To calibrate a tool it must be the active tool When selecting a tool and pressing ENTER the CNC only shows the data for that tool Press CYCLE START for the CNC to make the tool change so it becomes the active tool See Selecting a tool on page 81 3 Calibrate the tool Approach the tool manually until touching the part and then validate the calibration using the softkey menu After validating the calibration it updates the values and initializes the wear value to zero Them the new values are saved in the tool table To calibrate another tool repeat steps 2 and 3 Considerations for the offsets It must be borne in mind that the offset of a tool on an axis is the distance between the base of the tool and its tip nose Thi
109. arges connect the ground terminals of all the modules to the main ground terminal Before connecting the inputs and outputs of this unit make sure that all the grounding connections are properly made O Make sure that it is connected to ground In order to avoid electrical shock before turning the unit on verify that the ground connection is properly made O Do not work in humid environments In order to avoid electrical discharges always work under 90 of relative humidity non condensing and 45 C 113 F O Do not work in explosive environments In order to avoid risks or damages do no work in explosive environments PRECAUTIONS AGAINST PRODUCT DAMAGE O Working environment This unit is ready to be used in Industrial Environments complying with the directives and regulations effective in the European Community Fagor Automation shall not be held responsible for any damage suffered or caused when installed in other environments residential or homes O Install the unit in the right place FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x XI It is recommended whenever possible to install the CNC away from coolants chemical product blows etc that could damage it This unit complies with the European directives on electromagnetic compatibility Nevertheless it is recommended to keep it away from sources of electromagnetic disturbance such as e Powerful loads connected to the same AC power line as this equipment e N
110. art program it accesses either the profile editor or canned cycle editor accordingly GENERAL CONCEPTS Description of the keys FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 1 3 3 Description of the operator panel Depending on the utility of the different elements the operator panel may be considered to be laid out as follows JOG keys 1 They are used to jog the axes There are two types of JOG panels a There are two keys for each axis One to jog the axis in the positive direction and another one to move it in the negative direction Jogging the axis in the positive direction The movement is carried out at the jog feedrate Jogging the axis in the negative direction The movement is carried out at the jog feedrate X Rapid jogging of the axis When combined with another JOG key it moves the axis at rapid jog feedrate GENERAL CONCEPTS Description of the keys a There is a key for each axis and two keys for moving direction common to all the axes Both keys axis and direction must be pressed to jog the axis Axis selection Selection of the moving direction Rapid jogging of the axis When combined with another JOG key it moves the axis at rapid jog feedrate GE Lt Feed selectors The operator panel has two selectors Movement type selector M fut SN Select the type of jog movement which may be either by handwheels incremental 1000 10000 100 jo
111. ate it 4 Make a safety backup copy of the tool data out to a file Keys for tool table editing 4 3 To move the cursor through the table data To validate the new value To activat tivate the selection n n cl o activate deactivate the selection boxes and open close drop FAGOR lists CNC 8070 To select the line before or after the comment soins To move the cursor to the beginning or end of the comment line k e To move the cursor whitin a data E p Sort V03 0x 189 O O O Operating manual 9 4 Active tools table This table shows the list of available tools and which one is active in each channel The table is divided in two panels To switch panels press the panel change key ACTIVE TOOLS E Name Positio MILL 8 ENDMILL 3 ENDMILL status W ramy L ACTIVE D REMAINING LIFE 63 Min 2 l na p ENDMILL 5 M1 T M a ENDMILL ACTIVE TOOL CHANNEL 2 ENDMILL 12 prices BORE status W ramy o J REAMER Active tools table m TOOL OF THE POSITION SELECTED ON THE LIST DRILL 10 Froma 6 status W Famy L 7 ACTIVED REMAINING LIFE nivel i P ono DRILL 4 5 g n R TDo000 3 DRILL 20 Remaining lite T D L R ENDMILL I 4 I 1 I 103 Min I 40 0000 I 6 0000 TOOL AND MAGAZINE TABLE A Tool listing B Active tools C Tool selected on the list The left panel show
112. ation service 14 9 Command genef to sisca aai ia DIAGNOSIS 15 1 Appearance of the diagnosis mode ccceeeceeeceee eee ceeeeeeeeeaaeeeseeaeeeseaeeeteeeeetee 15 1 1 SCHECMCOSCHIPUOM PPPRP T 15 1 2 Icon description vertical softkeys esseeserssereersrrresierirernsrinsrnsrrnsrnnrnssrnrenes 15 2 Configuration diagnosis 15 2 1 System diagnosis 15 2 2 Software diagnosis 0 0 cece eect eeeeee jiz 15 2 3 Hardware diagnosis CAN bus and SERCOS esssssssssesssesierrerrierrnrrrerenrresr 15 35 SOlCOSiDIAQNOSIS ssri ea ant tea wdceecadee cosets adsdecenaiesiseincandends gies 15 4 Save the CAN configuration for the start up test on 15 5 Generate a report with the system informatiOn ccccceceeceeeeeeeeeteeeeseeeeeeeaes FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x ABOUT THIS MANUAL Title Operating Manual Type of documentation Description and operation of each table windows and work modes of the CNC Internal code Itis part of the manual directed to the end user The code ofthe manual depends on the software version standard or advanced CNC 8070 USER IN STAN Code 03753611 CNC 8070 USER IN AVANZ Code 03753631 Version It corresponds to the software version Soft V03 0x Start up Verify that the machine that integrates this CNC meets the 89 392 CEE Directive Before starting up the CNC read the instructions of chapter 1 in t
113. ation speed Keys for defining the measurement 3 2 To move the ruler cursor A gt o me c O 2 e pel z L Q Oo 6 EDITING SIMULATION MODE FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 125 Program window EDITING SIMULATION MODE FAGOR CNC 8070 SoFT V03 0x 126 6 6 Program window It shows the contents of the program selected for simulation and allows selecting the first and last blocks of the simulation When not selected the simulation will begin at the first block of the block and will end after executing one of the end of program functions M02 or M30 While simulating the window cursor will show the block being simulated Description of the program window The program window shows the following information Co EXAMPLE A Title bar Name of the program selected for simulation B Program blocks Contents of the program selected for simulation While simulating the cursor will indicate the block being simulated C Program line Line of the program where the cursor is Softkey menus of the program window When selecting the program window the horizontal softkey menu will show the options related to this window The options available in the softkey menu are the following See 6 7 Program window softkeys on page 128 O First block To set the first block of the simulation O Stop condition To select the block where the simulation of
114. bined When selecting this option the CNC shows a list of the programs that may be imported into the one being edited Select the desired program from the list and press ENTER After selecting the file define how the various layers of the DXF file are to be converted into ISO code Once this data has been set press the Convert softkey to import the file into the part program DXF file configuration When importing a DXF file it shows the configuration window to define how the different layers of the drawing must be treated The configuration window shows three areas clearly and distinctly Layer description area The DXF files may consist of layers and each one has different heights of the drawing All the layers together make up the whole drawing When importing the file you can decide which layers to include in the part program By default all the layers are included To exclude a layer select it and press the Disable layer softkey For each layer it indicates its priority and offset height on the perpendicular axis Layer priority and offset It shows the data of the layer selected by the cursor For each layer one must define its priority and offset height on the perpendicular axis e The priority defines the order in which the layers will be executed i e the order in which they will be included in the part program Those with priority 1 will be executed first and so on e The offset height on the perpend
115. ble from the horizontal softkey menu CNC 8070 After pressing the icon the CNC will ask where to save the data files Select the desired folder and press ENTER The selection process may be canceled by pressing the ESC key SoFT V03 0x 174 Recall the tables It may be used to restore the data in ASCII format of the tables from the files The tables may be loaded one by one or all of them simultaneously In either case the action is carried out from the vertical softkey menu using one of the following icons Loading all the tables at the same time To load all the tables at the same time no table must be selected See 9 1 1 Table selection on page 172 Loading each table separately To load the tables one by one select each table from the horizontal softkey menu To load the data of all the tables recommended follow a particular loading order to guarantee data consistency After pressing the icon the CNC will ask the location of the data files Select the desired folder and press ENTER The selection process may be canceled by pressing the ESC key Order sequence to follow when loading the different tables As mentioned earlier there are two ways to load the table data from the ASCII files loading all of them at the same time or selecting each table and loading its data Loading all the tables at the same time In this case it is up to the CNC to set the order Sequence used to load t
116. both sides of the theoretical circle e Scale or value in microns of each division e Error margin Percentage of the area that is occupied by the error margin divisions area See Machine parameter editing on page 277 SETUP ASSISTANCE The circularity roundness test Movement subroutine The circular interpolation is carried out using a subroutine See Define and execute the movement subroutine on page 291 The following data is taken into consideration when executing the subroutine e Plane where the circle is executed e Circle center coordinates e Circle radius e Programmed feedrate e Turning direction Parameters to be set To make the adjustment itis possible to change the CNC machine parameters or the drive machine parameters involved See Adjustment of the machine parameters involved on page 293 It is possible to interact with up to 11 different machine parameters Some of these parameters are always visible but some may be defined at will For each parameter it shows its value on each axis of the work plane To see the whole list of parameters that may be defined see section 13 3 8 Machine parameters that may be modified FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 287 13 W g 9 g a o a E ar 2 2 Ee Wo 0 5 2 5 o H FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 288 M Softkey menu Horizontal softkey menu The horizontal softkey menu offers the following o
117. ccessing the jog mode from the automatic mode the CNC keeps the machining conditions selected in the last mode Operations in this work mode The following operations are possible in this work mode e Display various data related to axes position Position referred to part zero or to home following error etc e Home the axes Machine reference zero search e Jog the axes using the keys on the operator panel or electronic handwheels e Move an axis to a position by previously selecting the target point e Preset a coordinate e Start and stop the spindle manually using the keys of the operator panel e Change tools e Activate up to 16 external devices using the keys of the upper side of the operator panel The external devices associated with each key must be defined by the machine manufacturer e Calibrate a tool in jog mode without probe in semi automatic mode when using a table top probe or using the tool calibration cycle also when using a table top probe FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 63 MANUAL JOG MODE Appearance of the Manual JOG mode FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 64 4 1 Appearance of the Manual JOG mode This mode may be displayed with several screens The current screen and the total number of available screens are shown at the upper right hand side of the general status bar Switching between the different screens is done by pressing the jog mode accessing key The screen sel
118. ce of the Manual JOG Mode sessseessssisisssiissrisssisrsrsinssrisnsinnsrrnssnns 4 1 1 Description of a typical screen of this work mode 4 1 2 Vertical softkey MeNU ICONS srpna a FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x CHAPTER 5 CHAPTER 6 4 2 Operations With the aXES siseseid a aa aa a 67 4 2 1 Home search n se 67 4 2 2 Jogging the axes 68 4 2 3 Jogging the axes with handwheels cccceeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeaae 70 4 2 4 Moving an axis to a particular position Coordinate ccccceeceeeeeeeteeeeetteeees 72 4 2 5 Coordinate preset ivi 4 3 Spindle contol saser iresi isasara ciel EN EAE EE EEAS POES EAN a EEPOSE ESERE 4 4 Tool selection and tool Change sicsicecei lie cdeccciend ected iidevesvis eeedasedael auanse teeter tence 4 5 Definition of cutting conditions 4 6 Automatic loading of zero offsets or fixture offset tables MANUAL JOG MODE TOOL CALIBRATION 5 1 Manual calibration Calibration without a probe esssesessessrseerieserirerersssrssssisnsnens 5 2 Semi automatic calibration Calibration with a probe s 5 3 Automatic calibration with a probe and a canned CyClC ccceceeeeeceetteeeeeeeeeeee 86 5 3 1 Mill or lathe model trihedron geometrical configuration cceeeeeeees 86 5 3 2 Lathe model plane geometrical Configuration cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeetteeeeeeees 89
119. changes the operation of the drive e Intermediate level OEM This level gives access to a large group of parameters that depend on the motor connected they set how the electronics of the drive is adapted to that motor e Maximum level FAGOR This level gives full access to all the variables parameters and commands of the system The Fagor level gives access to a group of parameters depending on the drive s electronics and they factory set Only technicians from Fagor Automation are granted a FAGOR access level 14 5 Parameters and variables service A This service shows the list of parameters and or variables of the drive It is selected with the VIEW softkey of the horizontal menu PAR METERS SPINDLE DATOS INTERNOS SET 0 VALUE UNIT The command bar is located at the bottom of the window See 14 3 Command bar on page 302 Selection of the elements to be displayed The VIEW softkey of the horizontal menu may be used to choose displaying either the parameters and variables only the parameters or only the variables From the top of the window it is possible to select e The drive whose parameters and or variables are to be consulted e The group of parameters and or variables to work with Once selected the list will show the elements of the selected group e The set of parameters to be consulted Those parameters and or variables that have sets will disp
120. city Command gt Velocity Limit This screen monitors the status of the operation being carried out at the drive The drive whose operations are to be monitored is selected at the top of the window There is a led for each operation and it shows the status of the operation at the drive Green led Operation active Black led Operation inactive Monitoring the status of the operations of the drive The DIGITAL 1I oOsoftkey of the horizontal menu gives access to this option DIGITAL INPUT OUTPUT SPINDLE M DRIVE ENABLE SIGNAL SPEED ENABLE SIGNAL DR OK SPEED ENABLE DRIVE ENABLE HALT TORQUE STATUS el el2 613 l4 01 gt gt Press ENTER O2 gt gt Press ENTER This screen monitors the status of the digital inputs and outputs of the drive The drive whose digital I O s are to be monitored is selected at the top of the window There is a led for each digital input and output of the drive and it shows its status Green led Input or output active Black led Input or output inactive ox gt DDSSETUP Information service FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 309 r O O O Operating manual m DDSSETUP f Information service FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 310 Type of inputs and outputs The inputs and outputs may be grouped as follows e Inputs and outputs that cannot be assigned These inputs and outputs indicate the status of the drive s control s
121. combination CTRL A What can you do in this work mode The machine parameter operating mode offers the following operations e Edit and modify the machine parameter tables Validate the machine parameter tables Saving the table contents Recalling the table contents e Printing the table contents e Initializing the tables The machine parameter tables may be edited in this mode or be copied from a floppy disk or other peripheral connected to the CNC via Ethernet FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 255 Parameter setting To set the machine parameter tables proceed as follows 1 Edit the values of the tables First set the general machine parameters because they define the axes of the machine thus the axis machine parameters The general machine parameters can also be used to define the data for the cross compensation 1 2 Use the axis machine parameters to determine whether leadscrew error compensation will be applied or not and define the data of the corresponding a table m 2 Validate the table data He E This operation is a must after defining the parameters of the tables and every time lt any of the data is modified x 3 Save the data of the table It is recommended to save the data of the machine parameter table so as to have I a backup copy of them The data may be stored at the CNC in a floppy disk or at another CNC or PC connected through Ethernet FAGOR CNC 8070 SoF
122. cus moves with the keys 2 Enter the coordinate of the target point 3 Press START to execute the movement or ESC to cancel the operation Feedrate behavior The moving feedrate depends on whether GOO or G01 is active e If GOO is active the movement is carried out at the rapid rate defined by the machine manufacturer e If G01 is active the movement is carried out at the active feedrate If no feedrate is active the movement is executed at the feedrate defined by the machine manufacturer This feedrate may be varied between 0 and 200 using the feedrate override switch on the operator panel The percentage will be applied on to all the movements carried out in GOO and in G01 4 2 5 Coordinate preset Coordinates must be preset axis by axis following these steps 1 Select the axis to be homed using the alphanumeric keyboard The CNC will highlight that axis to indicate that it is selected To select the numbered axes e g X1 select any axis and then move the selection until positioning on the desired one The focus moves with the keys 2 Key in the desired preset value 3 Press START to preset the entered value or ESC to cancel the operation The preset may be canceled by homing the axes one by one or by means of function G53 MANUAL JOG MODE Operations with the axes FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 73 Spindle control MANUAL JOG MODE FAGOR CNC 8070
123. cuted in that case the first block of the program will be assumed as the first block FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 41 AUTOMATIC MODE Data screen softkeys FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 42 3 3 2 Stop condition To set the block where the execution of the program or subroutine will be interrupted After executing that block the execution may be resumed with the START key or canceled with the RESET key If the last block is not set the program execution will end executing one of the end of program functions M02 or M30 When selecting this option the softkey menu of the CNC shows the options available for selecting the stop condition To return to the main menu press the key for the previous menu Subroutine selection To select the stop condition in a global subroutine which has been called upon from the program When selecting this option the CNC shows a list of programs available for selecting the desired subroutine Keys for selecting a program To switch windows To move the cursor thru the elements of the window To open the selected subroutine ESC To cancel the selection and close the program listing To select a subroutine from the list 1 Select the folder containing the subroutine 2 Select the program containing the subroutine or write its name in the bottom window 3 Press ENTER to open the program or ESC to cancel the selection and close t
124. d of the program The established last block remains active until itis canceled with ESC ora program is simulated in that case the execution of one of the functions M02 or M30 is set as the stop condition Program window softkeys EDITING SIMULATION MODE FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 129 2 O O Operating manual Number of times It sets as stop condition that the block selected as the last block has been executed a specific number of times When selecting this option the CNC requests the number of times the block must be executed before finishing After entering the number of times press ENTER to validate the value or ESC to cancel it EDITING SIMULATION MODE Program window softkeys FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 130 6 7 3 Find text To find text or a character string throughout the program When selecting this option the CNC shows a dialog box requesting the text to be found It is also possible to select whether the search must start at the beginning of the program or at cursor position To move the cursor through the elements of the list Find text 6 TEXT UT og START BEGINNING lt 8 C CURSOR f Y s F o a lu It selects an option from a group ENTER To start the search ESC To cancel the search and close the dialog box To start the search press ENTER and the cursor will position on
125. d or backward 1 frame 5 frames or the whole video gt S e SPACE To stop the video oe To play the video FAGOR 8070 CNC Sort V03 0x 251 O O O Operation manual 11 13 4 Displaying PLC errors When activating an error marks ERR1 through ERR256 part program execution is interrupted and the center of the screen displays a window with the error number and its associated text Error window When there is an active error no other action but deleting it is allowed Although the error window disappears from the screen when pressing ESC the error state is not eliminated To get out of the error state press RESET h PLC Messages service FAGOR 8070 CNC SoFT V03 0x 252 11 13 5 Save load and print a message and error table Save table To save the table data press the Save softkey and the CNC will show a list with the files saved at the CNC To save the table data 1 Select the destination folder 2 Define the file name at the bottom window To replace an existing file selectit from the list 3 Press ENTER to save the file or ESC to cancel the operation b PLC Messages service The file will be saved with the extension MEF Load table To recover the table data press the Load softkey the CNC will show a list with the files available at the CNC To load the table data 1 Select the folder where the file
126. de FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 207 UTILITIES MODE Appearance of the utilities mode FAGOR CNC 8070 SoFT V03 0x 208 10 1 3 Vertical softkey menu icons v The icon menu always shows all the icons related to the Utilities mode The group of icons of this menu may be expanded with the softkey associated with the icon that offers a new set of icons List of icons Cut Copies the selected files on the clipboard After pasting the content of the clipboard the files are deleted from the folder This icon is only available when there is a file selected Copy Copies the selected files on the clipboard This icon is only available when there is a file selected Paste Pastes the files from the clipboard into the selected folder If the files were placed using the Cut option they will be removed from their original location The contents of the clipboard are not eliminated after pasting Therefore this pasting operation may be repeated as often as you wish Rename It is used to change the name of the folder or file currently selected e When renaming a folder if there is one already with the new name the proposed name change will be ignored and the folder will keep its original name e If when renaming a file there is a previous file with the same name in the folder the new file replaces the previous one Modifiable file Itis used to change the modifiable
127. diagram Besides the Bode diagram the graphics window shows in dark blue the maximum and minimum gains in black the gain and frequency values of each line of the grid andin light blue the maximum and minimum values obtained when analyzing the axis The colors mentioned earlier for the different data shown on the screen are the default ones Use the Options softkey to change them The Bode diagram m 5 lt ol 2 D a lt a H m 7 FAGOR CNC 8070 SOFT V03 0x M Softkey menu There are some horizontal and vertical softkeys for changing the various options Horizontal softkey menu The horizontal softkey menu offers the following options O Softkey ANALYZE AXIS This softkey begins the estimation of the frequency response of the selected axis by means of the options O Softkey END ANALYSIS This softkey ends the estimation of the frequency response of the selected axis by means of the options The Bode diagram O Softkey PRINT SETUP ASSISTANCE GO This softkey serves to send the Bode graph as a bitmap out to a printer or toa file This makes it possible to print the screen The border is removed when printing the screen O Softkey CLEAR SCREEN This softkey initializes the graphics O Softkey DIMENSIONS This softkey serves to modify the maximum and minimum gains represented in the graphics Pressing this options displays a new menu with two horizontal softkeys e Sof
128. distance If the CNC does not receive the probe signal before reaching moving this probing distance it stops the axes Probing feedrate Tool to be calibrated Tool offset to be calibrated Length wear Tool length Tool calibration steps To calibrate the tool follow these steps 1 Define the probing distance and feedrate If the feedrate is not defined the probing movement will be made at the feedrate set by the OEM 2 Select the tool and the offset to be calibrated After the selection the CNC shows the dimensions defined in the tool table for that offset To calibrate a tool it must be the active tool When selecting a tool and pressing ENTER the CNC only shows the data for that tool Press CYCLE START for the CNC to make the tool change so it becomes the active tool See Tool calibration on page 84 3 Manually approach the tool to the probe until it is placed on the path that will be used for probing To calibrate the radius with a cylindrical probe the path must coincide with the probe s center point if not the radius will be calculated wrong 4 Calibrate the tool Select the axis and the probing direction on the softkey menu and press START The probe moves in parallel to the axis and in the selected direction until touching the probe It updates the measured value and resets the wear value to zero The data is stored in the tool table A MANUAL JOG MODE TOOL CALIBRATION Semi automatic cal
129. drives the drive parameters may also be adjusted How to select the parameters The parameter setting area shows three data columns The parameters are defined in the first column The rest of the fields show the parameter value for each axis The list of valid parameters is shown when editing a parameter or pressing SPACE Use the keys to move through the list and ENTER to select one of them Once selected the rest of the fields show the parameter value for each axis To select the parameters of the drive simply write their names Save the value of the parameters The new data is assumed by the CNC until the unit is turned off Once the setup is completed the changes must be saved so they can be effective next time the CNC is turned on Use the VALIDATE softkey to save the data The CNC saves the new values in the CNC tables and or in the drive tables accordingly When quitting the circularity test without having saved the parameters the CNC will show a message warning about it and will give a chance to save them FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 293 13 W D O g ze g n 2 o lt S Q 2 gt e W ns 2 O o H FAGOR CNC 8070 SoFT V03 0x 294 Password protected parameters If the machine parameters are protected a password will be requested when trying to modify them If entered correctly it stores it and it does not request it again unless the CNC is turned off If the
130. ducted Class A Group 1 Current armonics Flickers and Voltage fluctuations Immunity Electrostatic discharges Bursts and Fast transients High Voltage conducted pulses Surges Voltage fluctuations and Outages Radiofrequency radiated electromagnetic fields Conducted disturbance induced by radio frequency fields As instructed by the European Community Directives 73 23 EEC modification 93 68 ECC on Low Voltage and 89 336 CEE on Electromagnetic Compatibility FAGOR In Mondrag n on February 1st 2002 CNC 8070 fi F mona Ihe isda D rent j Bx SoFT V03 0x SAFETY CONDITIONS Read the following safety measures in order to prevent harming people or damage to this product and those products connected to it This unit may only be repaired by authorized personnel at Fagor Automation Fagor Automation shall not be held responsible of any physical damage or defective unit resulting from not complying with these basic safety regulations PRECAUTIONS AGAINST PERSONAL DAMAGE O Interconnection of modules Use the connection cables provided with the unit O Use proper cables To prevent risks use the proper cables for mains Sercos and Bus Can recomended for this unit O Avoid electrical overloads In order to avoid electrical discharges and fire hazards do not apply electrical voltage outside the range selected on the rear panel of the Central Unit O Ground connection In order to avoid electrical disch
131. e softkey which offers a new set of options 11 10 1 Description of resource tables As mentioned earlier the user resources and symbols defined are displayed in different tables Each table shows the following information Timers This table shows the timers and user defined symbols for the timers and their status This table has the following fields b ol G It indicates whether any of the trigger inputs of the timer is active TG1 TG2 TG3 or TG4 Oo oO ee 2 M Timer status a z wn S Stopped D a 5 T Timing D Disabled E Status of the Enable input TEN R Status of the Reset input TRS T Status output ET Elapsed time TO Remaining time The inputs and outputs that are high will be indicated with a green symbol Registers This table shows the registers and user symbols defined for the registers as well as their values The values may be shown in decimal hexadecimal or binary format Binary resources This table shows the binary resources inputs outputs messages errors and the user defined symbols for the binary resources as well as information on the their status Counters This table shows the counters and user symbols defined for the counters as well as their status This table has the following fields Status of the enable input CEN Status of the Count up input CUP FAGOR Status of the Countdown input CDW Status of the preset input CPR 8070 CNC Stat
132. e 4 cn iat oicora ole 4 F A Name of the resources being used by the PLC project B File of the PLC project where the resource is being used C Line within the file containing the resource D How the resource is being used For the inputs outputs marks and registers The resource is used as a consultation The resource is used as an action For the timers TG Timer trigger I T Status consultation TEN Enable input TRS Reset input For the counters FAGOR Cc Status consultation CPR Counter preset 8070 CNC CEN Enable input CUP Count up input CDW Countdown input Sort V03 0x 244 11 11 1 Options of the Cross reference service softkeys When accessing the Cross reference service the softkey menu will offer the following options Inputs It shows information about the inputs Outputs b It shows information about the outputs Marks PLC Cross references service It shows information about the marks Registers It shows information about the registers Timers It shows information about the timers Counters It shows information about the counters Print It is used to print the cross reference tables out to a printer connected to the CNC or as a PRN file at the CNC When printing to a file it is saved in the folder C Cnc8070 Users Reports prn When selecting this option the CNC shows a dialog box requesting the destination for the file printer or file W
133. e a text with another text When selecting this option the CNC shows a dialog box requesting the line number orthe text to look for When defining a text search certain options may also be defining that allow A Replacing the text being searched with another in the program B Ignore uppercase and lowercase b h C Consider the text to find as a whole word D Select whether the search starts at the beginning of the program or at the cursor position PLC Program editing softkeys Find replace FIND 7 REPLACE GOTO LINE FIND TEXT REPLACE WITH MATCH CASE J MATCH WHOLE WORD ONLY START BEGINNING C CURSOR To move the cursor through the elements of the list Space To activate deactivate the selection box B C To select an option of a group D ER To start the search ESC To cancel the search and close the dialog box After defining the search options press ENTER to start the search or ESC to cancel it The text found in the program will be highlighted and the softkey menu will show the following options e Replace to replace the highlighted text e Replace all to replace the text throughout the whole program e Find next to skip this text and keep on searching To end the search press ESC FAGOR 8070 CNC Sort V03 0x 227 11 PLC Program editing softkeys FAGOR 8070 CNC Sort V03
134. e and error table F 11 13 3 Displaying PLC messageS sssesisssssrrssessrresesrrusnasrnusensrnnsassruecnsrnuecasrnneeasnnnean 11 13 4 Displaying PLC OfOFS i icccssccocecscsiecssccveccescesseadensttdccaseodersasvesseanserecsvnassedeattsdtessess 11 13 5 Save load and print a message and error table c cccececeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeteeeeeeaee MACHINE PARAMETERS 12 1 Appearance of the machine parameter tables cccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 257 12 1 1 Icon description vertical softkeys 12 2 Parameter table description z 12 2 1 M function setting table srsnsnrnnna r oaasi iria 12 2 2 Compensation tables i aa anid d 12 3 Operations with tables 12 3 1 Data editing and validation 12 3 2 Save and recall tables si 12 3 3 o E ES AP 2escczacosesonesact dackcitecusansshasndcgsaasseks ses shesadecesteeosschdctedsneaaitnauessnen SETUP ASSISTANCE US 1 OSCIIOSCOP Ciais ssi sn sicetvssices satttazeaseccesdncazeasesenainerecinsd cence ive atveanedeatsuieesaesedaesden seis dtes 269 13 1 1 Interface CEScriptiom kesis cn aaka nese elise ce ia teased 270 13 1 2 Configuration SCre N c eeeceeeeeeeeeteeeeeeneeees 275 13 1 3 Configure and execute the oscilloscope function 13 1 4 Machine parameter editing c ceeeeeeeeee 13 2 TNO Bode diaQrammsecieecececi cegecet siecccsenee shia aeaaeai iderana 13 2 1 In
135. e are several active messages it will display the one with highest priority the one with lowest number It will also show the sign next to the PLC message window to indicate that there are more messages activated by the PLC b h Message window 9 8 QA D In order to expand the PLC message window and display the active message list p press the key combination CTRL M The list will show a symbol next to each z message to indicate that it has a file with additional information associated with it A o 2 A It does not have a file with additional information It has a file with additional information To display a message select it with the cursor and press ENTER If the message has an additional information file it will be displayed on the screen To close the additional information window press ESC File with additional information The files with additional information defined by the machine manufacturer may be displayed automatically when activating the message if so defined in the message table or when requested by the user at the message window The following keys are available to move around in the additional information window depending on the type of file displayed TXT BMP JPG HTM HTML or AVI e TXT BMP JPG HTM HTML file frome To move the window contents up or down one line one page or T lfm everything e AVI file lt a jme To stop and moves the video forwar
136. e both milling and lather tools The CNC will show the necessary data and will update the help graphics according to the selected tool PRBIMAX 10 PRB2MAX 10 PRBIMIN 0 PRB2MIN 0 Program T D fill in the cycle data and press START A Machine data is optionally shown Position of the axes tool and active tool offset real spindle speed and real feedrate of the axes B Area to define the calibration data C Probe position Tool calibration The calibration is done using a probing canned cycle The CNC moves the tool until touching the probe and validates the calibration on each axis The tool is calibrated on the two axes of the plane The calibration begins when pressing the CYCLE START key When the CNC finishes the calibration on the selected axes it updates the dimensions and the wears Them the new values are saved in the tool table XYZ The horizontal softkey menu offers the option to show the machine data such as FSTD position of the axes feedrate etc This data is shown on the help graphics of the window Selecting a tool In this calibration mode the cycle itself changes the tool and the tool offset There is no need to previously place the tool in the spindle Bear in mind that pressing the CYCLE START key starts the calibration cycle Select another position for the probe The calibration uses the probe position defined in the machine parameters Optionally another position may be defined
137. e different commands of the drive check variables and modify their value is they may be written The command bar may be selected with the window changing key same as the rest of the screen elements or using its associated softkey Executing commands of the drive The drop list offers the following commands To execute one of them select it from the list and press ENTER RESET ERRORS Fix ENCODER SIMULATOR I0 SAVE TO FLASH AUTOPHASING PARAMETER VALIDATION OFFLINE AUTOCALCULATE FRICTIONAINERTIA HOME SWITCH AUTOCALIBRATION SOFT RESET ENCODER PARAMETER STORE Resetting errors Setting the encoder simulator reference mark 10 Transferring parameters from RAM to Flash Autophasing Validating Calculating friction and inertia Auto calibration of the HomeSwitch Soft Reset Saving parameters at the encoder Consulting and modifying drive variables Read only variables may be consulted those with the R indicator on the attributes column Read write variables may be consulted and or edited those with the RW indicator on the attributes column See 14 5 Parameters and variables service on page 305 Ifavariable has been written pressing ENTER reads its value If a value is assigned to a variable when pressing ENTER it assumes the new value Variables may be identified using their mnemonic or their Sercos identifier Refer to the drive s manual to know the list of available variables PV210
138. e graphic window is selected use the and keys to divide or multiply this time base by two Start distance Trigger distance This data is only shown when there is a trace Start distance It represents the time difference between the indicator cursor and the base point of the trace beginning of the trace if there is no trigger point or it has not been reached Trigger distance It represents the time difference between the indicator cursor and the trigger point if it has taken place The value is updated when moving the indicator cursor of the graphic area Its value may also be edited thus updating the cursor position in the graphic area Reference distance This data is only shown when there is a trace already and the operator has put a reference signal It represents the time difference between the indicator cursor and the reference signal The value is updated when moving the indicator cursor of the graphic area Its value may also be edited thus updating the cursor position in the graphic area Trace status This element cannot be edited it automatically reflects the status of the trace The possible messages are e Empty e Beginning e Executing e Stopping e Full 11 9 2 Save load and reset the analyzer configuration Save the configuration It is used to save the current configuration of the logic analyzer PLC variables and expressions trigger conditions graphic traces into a file When select
139. e operation 4 6 Automatic loading of zero offsets or fixture offset tables EH It may be used to save the active zero offset in the zero offset or fixture offset table This operation is carried out using the Load table icon Proceed as follows 1 Press the icon for Load table The CNC shows the list of available zero offsets and fixture offsets 2 Select the zero offset or fixture offset where you wish to save the active offset 3 Press ENTER to enter the offset in the table The ESC key cancels the operation at any time MANUAL JOG MODE Automatic loading of zero offsets or fixture offset tables FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 77 2 O O Operating manual vr s q8 JOSHO 1N X JO S S JO 01 Z JO Hulpeo onewozny JAQON Dor IWANVIN CNC 8070 SOFT V03 0x MANUAL JOG MODE TOOL CALIBRATION Tool calibration is available in the jog mode The softkey to access tool calibration will be different depending on the software installed lathe model or mill model To quit the calibration mode and return to jog mode press the ESC key Icon to access tool calibration in a mill model ya Icon to access tool calibration in a lathe model Offs The CNC offers in both models the possibility to calibrate lathe tools and milling tools The CNC will show the necessary data and will update the help graphics according to the selected tool Types of calibration There are several ways
140. e selected colors FAGOR CNC 8070 SoFT V03 0x 54 3 5 8 Options It is used to set the appearance and some functions of the graphic window These options may be used at any time even while executing a program When selecting this option the softkey menu shows the available options To return to the main menu press the key for the previous menu Option Activate Deactivate It is used to activate or deactivate the graphic representation When the graphic representation is deactivated and activated the current graphic is erased but the display conditions are kept active type of graphics zoom graphic parameters and display area that were active before that mode was deactivated Option Simple Combined It is used to hide or show the dialog and data areas on the right hand side of the graphic window so the drawing occupies the whole graphic window Option Hide Tool Show Tool It is used to hide or show the tool while executing in 3D solid graphics Option Print It is used to print the graphics in a printer connected to the CNC or as a file BMP format at the CNC When printing to a file it is saved in the folder C Cnc8070 Users Reports bmp When selecting this option the CNC will show a dialog box requesting the print destination printer or file Print destination SELECT PRINT DESTINATION x PRINTER To select the print destination To print the drawing To cancel the
141. e table or from the PLC or via part program In this case the table values are updated after carrying out the operations indicated in the block being executed The parameter values may be displayed either in decimal notation 6475 873 or scientific 0 654E 3 FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x USER TABLES Operations with tables FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 168 8 5 Operations with tables 8 5 1 Data editing Select the desired table using the softkey menu Keys for editing the table data To move the cursor through the table cells B To move the cursor page by page ar R To move the cursor to the beginning or end of the table py To validate the new value ESC To ignore the defined value To edit the table data proceed as follows 1 Use the cursor to select the cell whose value is to be changed 2 Key in the new value 3 Press ENTER to accept the new value or ESC to ignore the new value and recover the previous one 8 5 2 Save and recall tables Saving a table It may be used to save the table data in ASCII format in a file After selecting the table whose data is to be saved press the SAVE icon and the CNC shows a list with the tables that are already saved Keys for selecting a data file To switch windows fi lt To close and open a folder submenu Z T To move the cursor thru the elements of the window a To save the
142. earby portable transmitters Radio telephones Ham radio transmitters e Nearby radio TV transmitters e Nearby arc welding machines e Nearby High Voltage power lines e Etc O Enclosures The manufacturer is responsible of assuring that the enclosure involving the equipment meets all the currently effective directives of the European Community Safety conditions O Avoid disturbances coming from the machine tool The machine tool must have all the interference generating elements relay coils contactors motors etc uncoupled O Use the proper power supply Use an external regulated 24Vdc power supply for the keyboard and the remote modules O Grounding of the power supply The zero volt point of the external power supply must be connected to the main ground point of the machine O Analog inputs and outputs connection It is recommended to connect them using shielded cables and connecting their shields mesh to the corresponding pin see chapter 1 in the Installation Manual O Ambient conditions The working temperature must be between 5 C and 45 C 41 F and 113 F The storage temperature must be between 25 C y 70 C 13 F y 158 F O Monitor enclosure Make sure that the gaps between the Central Unit and each wall of the enclosure are respected as indicated in chapter 1 of the Installation Manual Use a DC fan to improve enclosure ventilation O Main AC power switch This switch must be easy to acc
143. easier to understand O O O Operating manual 15 1 1 Screen description The diagnosis screen shows the following information CONFIGURATION SYSTEM Parameter 8070 CNC Version IDIC ABH cnceo70 0 SOFTWARE Windows Version 4 0 B Use RRRA Number of Processors 1 Processor Intel Pentium III 452 MHz B Physical Memory 65012 KB Total Virtual Memory 2093056 KB Free Virtual Memory 1952064 KB Free Physical Memory on drive C 1143840 KB A It shows the hardware and software configuration of the CNC System diagnosis Information on the system elements CNC version username microprocessor s used status of the various system memories etc Software diagnosis Information about the modules that make up the CNC software and the software options installed CNC8070 diagnosis Information about the elements connected to the CNC through the Can bus and Sercos drives input output cards etc B Diagnosis of the selected element C CNC messages ne To switch windows press the relevant key After selecting an element of the configuration 4 2 Hide or display the list of resources of an element To move the cursor through the elements of the list ESC To move the cursor to the beginning or end of the list DIAGNOSIS h a Appearance of the diagnosis mode FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 315 r O O O Operating m h DIAGNOSIS O1 Appearance of the
144. ection is rotary in such a way that when pressing this key on the last screen it shows the first one of the operating mode Standard configuration The standard configuration of this work mode described in this manual corresponds to the one supplied by Fagor In some cases the manual shows a sample screen instead of that of the CNC in order to make it easier to understand These screens may be customized by the machine manufacturer changing its contents as well as its appearance They may also remove certain screens or add some of their own 4 1 1 Description of a typical screen of this work mode A typical screen of the jog mode can show the following information O T 000000001 D 0i Sreal Sprog 00000 E S 100 Freal 00000 Fprog 00000 F F 100 Information related to the position of the axes In the screen configuration supplied by Fagor the data displayed will be different on each screen The most common thing is to show the current position of the axes referred to part zero in large characters and the amount of following error axis lag in small characters Another more detailed option shows the coordinates of the tool tip and those of the tool base being both referred to part zero and machine zero Active M functions Active G functions and high level commands Tool related information Tool number T currently selected and active tool offset D associated with the
145. ectly without accepting the changes by pressing ESC Customizing Save always amp Not always It is used to save the program automatically or manually e When auto save is on the CNC will automatically save the program after every change e When manual save is active the user must save the program as explained in the 11 4 2 File section of this chapter 11 5 Program monitoring To monitor a program select it from the list of the service window and select the Monitoring option of the softkey menu The CNC will display the monitoring window and it will show the instructions of the selected program To close the monitoring window press ESC Description of the monitoring window The editing window shows the following information PLC Program monitoring MONITORING PLCPRG PLC cY1 0 SERVO10N SERVO2ON SERVO3ON SERVO40N DRENAX DRENAY DRENAZ DRENA4 Q SPENA1 SPENA2 SPENA3 SPENA4 MOV 1 R100 MOVOR101 Q CNCWR R101 PLC TIMER M11 END PRG 3 START CYSTART Cambio de gama del cabezal oreren DM41 GEAR1 DM42 GEAR2 DM43 GEAR3 DM44 GEAR4 o A Title bar It shows the name of the program that is being monitored B Monitoring area It shows the status of the instructions being executed Itis a real time monitoring Only the instructions that are being executed are monitored The PLC will show in a different color t
146. ecution It closes the CNC8070 application then the whole system and finally turns the battery off GENERAL CONCEPTS Turning the CNC on and off FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 1 3 Description of the keys 1 3 1 Keys associated with the information on the screen F2 F8 F12 a fel HELP Lo Softkeys The softkeys or functions keys may be used to select the different options shown on the screen Horizontal softkeys It selects the options of the horizontal menu Vertical softkeys It selects the options of the vertical icon menu Using the screens Screen change Depending on how the OEM has set this key it will be possible to perform one of the following operations e Sequentially access the different screens of the active work mode In the PLC mode it switches between the various active services e Sequentially access the different channels e The horizontal softkey menu shows the available screens and the vertical menu shows the available channels Window change It is used to switch between the different windows of the screen Previous menu On the horizontal softkey menu it lets you go up from the softkey sub menu to the previous level from where that menu was accessed Help Help It accesses the CNC s system help 1 GENERAL CONCEPTS Description of the keys FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x GENERAL CONCEPTS Description of the keys
147. ed out of our warehouses The mentioned warranty covers repair material and labor costs at Fagor Automation facilities incurred in the repair of the products Within the warranty period Fagor Automation will repair or replace the products verified as being defective Fagor Automation is committed to repairing or replacing their products from the time they launch them up to 8 years after they disappear from the product catalog It is entirely up to Fagor Automation to determine whether a repair is to be considered under warranty Excluding clauses The repair will take place at our facilities therefore all shipping expenses as well as travelling expenses incurred by technical personnel are NOT under warranty even when the unit is under warranty This warranty will be applied so long as the equipment has been installed according to the instructions it has not been mistreated or damaged by accident or negligence and has been manipulated by personnel authorized by Fagor Automation If once the service call or repair has been completed the cause of the failure is not to be blamed ON the FAGOR product the customer must cover all generated expenses according to current fees No other implicit or explicit warranty is covered and FAGOR AUTOMATION shall not be held responsible under any circumstances of the damage which could be originated Service contracts Service and Maintenance Contracts are available for the customer within the
148. editor without saving the program Once the program has been saved the top of the editing window will show the name of the new program Editing window softkeys O9 EDITING SIMULATION MODE FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 103 EDITING SIMULATION MODE Editing window softkeys FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 104 6 3 3 Undo File Include program It may be used to import the content of a part program into the one being edited Any program that may be accessed from the CNC may be imported even the program currently in execution When selecting this option the CNC shows a list of the programs that may be imported into the one being edited Keys for selecting a program To switch windows To move the cursor thru the elements of the window To save the new program ESC To cancel the selection and close the program listing To import a program from the list 1 Select the desired program from the list or write its name in the bottom window 2 Press ENTER to import the program or ESC to cancel the selection and close the program listing The selected program is added to the one being edited after the block indicated by the cursor a aaa es The program may be selected from the list as follows e By moving the cursor to the desired element e Using the alphanumeric keyboard Pressing a key will select the first elemen
149. een The full screen shows the blocks saved so far and an edit line for editing new blocks A History of edited blocks B Edit line FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 153 MDI MODE Standard MDI window FAGOR CNC 8070 SoFT V03 0x 154 7 2 Standard MDI window This window only shows the edit line of the MDI mode It is possible to edit and execute new blocks or recover blocks saved in the block history which may be modified before executing them Description The standard MDI mode window shows the following information T 000000001 Dipi NxTool 000000000 Sreal 00000 Sprog 00000 S 100 Freal 00000 Fprog 00000 F 100 A Window for the MDI mode Editing line Window where the blocks to be executed are edited Blocks are edited one by one 7 2 1 Block editing and execution In this window it is possible to edit and execute new blocks or the ones saved in the block history Only the blocks previously executed will be saved in the block history While editing it analyzes the syntax of the block being edited When trying to execute if the block is incorrect it shows a warning message and it does not execute it Block editing The blocks may be edited directly on the edit line or may be recalled from the block history Keys for selecting a block from history 4 2 To access the history and select a block To accept the selection and show the block on the edit
150. elected assignments ae To show the list of the assignments made ESC To close the list of the assignments made To remove a resource or user symbol from a table select that element and press FAGOR ate Keys for defining the data of the logic analyzer 8070 CNC To select one of the tables iy To moves the cursor element by element To move the cursor to the beginning or end of the table i B To move the cursor page by page in the table Sort V03 0x To delete the selected resource of the table 242 11 10 3 Options of the Monitoring service softkeys When accessing the Monitoring option of the softkey menu the following options will be available Save set It is used to save the set of defined resources into a file When selecting this option the CNC displays a window with the list of the files MON currently saved To save a set of defined resources b ol 1 Define the file name at the bottom window To replace an existing one select it from the list 9 g 2 Press ENTER to save the program or ESC to cancel the selection and close a the program listing im 2 Load set S It is used to recover the set of resources previously saved into a file When selecting this option the CNC shows a window with the list of available files To load one of these files 1 Define the file name at the bottom window or select it from the list 2 Pr
151. elects an options and selects a color from the color pallet The ENTER key presses the button that is selected The ESC key closes the dialog box without accepting the changes On the drop lists the desired option may be selected using the keys on the keyboard The arrow keys move the cursor over the color pallet and over the options of a list 2 4 Windows for warnings and errors When an error occurs the CNC will display a window describing the cause of the error There are three types of errors The top of the window shows the category and it will have a different color depending on the type of error it shows WARNING Green window ERROR Red window FATAL ERROR Purple window N When several warnings and or errors occur simultaneously they are displayed from the one with the lowest priority to the one with the highest priority The top right side It is just that a warning o 2 of the window shows the priority level of the message A down arrow indicates that 5 o there are errors with lower priority and an up arrow indicates that there are errors with w 2 higher priority The operator can toggle the different active errors using the E keys Ww o e O q E E as WARNING Ox o Fo E Z They do not stop part program execution and the warning window may be closed by pressing ESC ERROR It may be a syntax error in a program PLC generated errors etc They are errors
152. ement the diagnosis window shows the list of the modules that make up the CNC software CONFIGURATION Modules Size Date 96KB 16 01 2001 12 45 20 302KB 24 01 2001 15 44 44 15KB 19 01 2001 15 19 00 280KB 24 01 2001 15 40 02 94KB 16 01 2001 12 54 16 104KB 16 01 2001 13 10 40 127 KB 24 01 2001 15 47 22 SYSTEM SOFTWARE Software options 2484KB 24 01 2001 15 44 26 a 17KB 12 12 2000 17 02 58 F Egh cNce070 0 WinKeyCtrl exe 118KB 19 01 2001 13 49 18 skemel exe 517KB 24 01 2001 15 46 52 AnaGeom dll 159KB 23 01 2001 03 15 22 287KB 24 01 2001 15 27 06 170KB 18 01 2001 15 05 50 138KB 24 01 2001 15 44 14 cmprmngr dl 15KB 24 01 2001 15 38 58 compbase dll 76KB 24 01 2001 15 27 04 x Attributes Value Product Name Original Name File OS ol DIAGNOSIS O1 Configuration diagnosis A Modules listing B Detailed information of the selected module It shows the size of each module in bytes and the date it was created When selecting a module from the list the bottom of the screen shows more detailed information Software options When selecting this element of the configuration the diagnosis window shows the j software options currently installed It also shows the horizontal softkey VALIDATION CODE for entering the resulting validation code according to the hardware ID of the unit and the desired options FAGOR CNC 8070 SoFT V03 0x
153. erwise these files will not be shown 10 2 3 O O O Operating manual Search in files It is used to search files When selecting this option the CNC shows a dialog box where the following data may be defined Find in file Filename filter f Nc Text jao x10 I Look in subfolders c IV Match case I Match whole word only Cancel To move the cursor through the elements of the list To activate deactivate the selection box C ES To start or cancel the defined search A Description of the files to be searched The and wild characters may be used on the search meaning i Any character string Any character In such a way that Looks for all the files NC Looks for all the files having the extension NC exa Looks for all the files beginning with exa B Text included within the files C Defines the search criteria e Look in the sub folders e Ignore uppercase and lowercase e Consider the text to find as a whole word D Start the defined search E Cancel the defined search After defining the search options place the cursor on one of the lower buttons to accept D or cancel E the defined search and press ENTER The file window will show the list of the programs found en i Bs x ae N w 2 E 3 as Es D FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 211 10 ee T x lt ae n w 2 E S as Es 2 D FAGOR CNC 8070 SoF
154. es editable data etc To insert the result press the INS key It closes the calculator and inserts the result 2 in the position that the cursor had when accessing the calculator O 5 Z 3 Os Ww O The calculator looks like this zs Ww The calculator looks like this 4 W CALCULADORA amp O ______ E e O I A Results window It shows the result of the expression after accepting it with the ENTER key This value may be recovered with the Acc button so it can be used in later calculations B Editing window It shows the expression being defined The expression may consistof one or several operations that may be defined directly from the keyboard or with the softkey menu options It saves the list of the last operations C Explorer window It shows at all times the result from evaluating the expression being defined When selecting a portion of the expression at the edit window it will show the result from evaluating that portion The result from evaluating the expression may be OK HHHHHHHH Numeric OK 1 INF Infinite FAGOR Error lt gt Syntax error Wrong expression Wrong expression eae ove CNC 8070 Operations history The expressions already accepted become part of the history and may be displayed using the relevant keys After selecting an expression from the window press the ENTER key to recover it The ESC key closes the history window SOFT V03 0x 25 aor TI Qnerating
155. ess ENTER to load the selected file or ESC to cancel the operation and close the program listing Binary It toggles between displaying the register values in decimal and hexadecimal format or only in binary Visibility It shows or hides certain resource tables Add row It increases the size of the active window where the cursor is by adding a file to it To move the cursor through the active tables Remove row It decreases the size of the active window where the cursor is by removing a row from it To move the cursor through the active tables Data input FAGOR It selects the data entry area 8070 CNC Clear all It deletes all the resources from the tables Sort V03 0x 243 11 11 Cross references service The Cross references service may be used to obtain information about the PLC resources being used in the PLC project Pressing the Show softkey accesses the window of this service To close the cross reference window press ESC 1 1 A Description oO 3 P 9 2 The screen of this service looks like this Qe oO oD CROSS REFERENCES MARKS N Fi 2 AUXEND p gt T BLKSEARCH plcpra ple 59 o plepra ple 60 2 plcpra ple 61 oO FA BLKSKIP1 plcpra ple 43 7 9 CYSTART plepra ple 15 oO DM03 plepra ple 26 s DM04 plcora ple 27 DMOS nlcpra plc 28 DM41 plcpra ple 20 DM42 plcpra ple 21 DM43 plcpra ple 22 DM44 plcpra ple 23 DRENA4 plcpra pl
156. ess and at a distance between 0 7 and 1 7 m 2 3 and 5 6 ft off the floor FAGOR aac CNC 8070 PROTECTIONS OF THE UNIT ITSELF O_O TT O Remote modules All the digital inputs and outputs have galvanic isolation via optocouplers oo eee between the CNC circuitry and the outside XII PRECAUTIONS DURING REPAIR O Do not get into the inside of the unit Only personnel authorized by Fagor Automation may manipulate the inside of this unit O Do not handle the connectors with the unit connected to AC power Before manipulating the connectors inputs outputs feedback etc make sure that the unit is not connected to AC power SAFETY SYMBOLS O Symbols that may appear on the manual Symbol of danger or prohibition It indicates actions or operations that may hurt people or damage products Warning symbol gt It indicates situations that certain operations could cause and the suggested actions to prevent them Obligation symbol It indicates actions and operations that must be carried out Information symbol E It indicates notes warnings and advises O Symbols that the product may carry Ground protection symbol It indicates that that point must be under voltage Safety conditions FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x XIII WARRANTY TERMS All products manufactured or marketed by Fagor Automation has a warranty period of 12 months from the day they are shipp
157. esting the print destination for the table printer or file Ww 2 as lt 5 e o a Print destination N 5 a z SELECT PRINT DESTINATION x 8 a2 PRINTER Zsa lt y J 2 Og To select the print destination a Cc 3 To print the drawing x no To cancel the printing After selecting the target press ENTER to start printing Press ESC to cancel the selection FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 176 9 2 Tool table 2 O O Operating manual This table defines the tools available and the data associated with each one of them The tool list is common to the whole system i e is common to all the available magazines Once the tools have been defined they may be distributed in the various magazines The table is divided in two panels To switch panels press the panel change key TOOLS ENDMILL Number 6 Position Name ENDMILL Family 6 Offse Count 1 Status AVAILABLE z p Geometry mm ENDMILL a5 Type une jd Subtype BALLEND hd ENDMILL 5 M1 Length 54 0000 L Wear 0 1250 Radius 8 0000 Rear 0 0800 Rp 8 0000 Rp Wear 0 Le 23 0000 Entry angle 89 0000 Monitoring Type Jorerarions gt Maximum life 125 Real life 23 p Magazine Size reom z Special IE S Positions to the left 1 2 E Positions to the right 1 2 i DRILL 10 DRILL 20 ENDMILL Comment oo O Tool table TOOL AND MAGAZ
158. etc the programs stored at the CNC e Perform a telediagnosis of the CNC 1 2 Turning the CNC on and off The way the CNC is turned on and off depends on how it has been set by the machine manufacturer However the most common way to do it is as follows Turning the CNC on After powering up the unit the operating system Windows 95 or Windows XP will start up first Then and depending on how the manufacturer has set it the CNC8070 application will either start up automatically or will have to be initiated by clicking on the icon shown on the screen While starting up it will display the initial standard CNC screen or the initial screen created by the machine manufacturer for that purpose Once the CNC is running it will show the screen for the work mode automatic or jog selected by the machine manufacturer Turning the CNC off To turn the CNC off press the key combination ALT F4 In any case the CNC must not be turned off if there is any program in execution After closing the CNC application and depending on how the manufacturer has set it the unit will turn off automatically orit will be required to select Shutdown the system option of the Start menu Once the application is closed the screen will show a message indicating to the operator that the unit may then be turned off e The unit must be turned off with the on off switch after having closed the application using the key combination mentioned earlier
159. etup assistance For faster and easier machine setup This mode offers the axis adjustment guide the circle test the oscilloscope and the Bode graphs Operating modes N E HOW TO OPERATE THE CNC FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 19 Dialog boxes HOW TO OPERATE THE CNC FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 20 2 3 Dialog boxes The dialog boxes consist of the following elements All the actions may be carried out with the mouse or via keyboard LABEL 1 LABEL 2 Courier Symbol f Times D Activate Option 1 C Option 2 O D D e Selection panels It selects among the different option groups within the same dialog box Drop list It selects an option from a list Clicking on the right icon the list expands Selection box It activates an option Option selection It selects an option from a group Selecting one cancels the previous one Color pallet Select a color Selection buttons They access a group of options or close the dialog box After making the changes the dialog boxes are closed using one of the buttons that let you accept or reject the changes made Using the keyboard The data of the dialog boxes are defined via keyboard as follows Using the CTRL TAB combination it is possible to select different panels of the dialog box The TAB key moves the cursor through the elements of the box The SPACE key activates the selection boxes s
160. for syntax errors Description of the editing window The editing window shows the following information SH G71 G94 T3 M6 W z 1000 M3 Q o fe xe G X 30 Y 30 z10 S G01 Z 10 F300 G42 X30 Y30 F650 Z D G37 120 O x70 h a qF 30 G38 120 G40 X 30 Y 30 G01 T oe 2 G42 X20 Y20 F650 0 G37 I20 za Yeo z x20 a 20 W G38 120 G40 X 30 Y 30 E2 Syntax error Unexpected X 16 E56 Unknown or incomplete word LINE 6 O _ auTonum cap ove NUM A Title bar Name of the program selected for editing It also indicates whether it is a read only program or not if read only while simulating or executing An next to the program means that the program has been modified since last saved only if automatic program saving is off B Edit area Program editing area showing its contents C Editing errors if any List of errors occurred while editing the program or syntax errors found in the syntax check D Status bar Information about cursor position and the status of the editor options such as AUTONUM Automatic block numbering When active the CNC automatically numbers the new blocks being generated CAP Capital letters When active the text is always written in capital letters OVR Overwrite text It toggles between overwriting and inserting text When active it overwrites the existing text NUM Numeric keypad active FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 97 Editing window EDI
161. ftkey menu shows the available options To return to the main menu press the key for the previous menu File Restore original This option is only available when the auto save option is active See 6 3 6 Customizing on page 107 Itis used to restore the original program without the changes made since the last time it was opened When selecting this option the CNC requests confirmation of the command Keys to move the cursor Moves the cursor through the selection buttons one Applies the option selected with the cursor File Save This option is only available when the Manual save option is active See 6 3 6 Customizing on page 107 To save the program being edited File Save as Itis used for saving a program that is being edited with a different name After saving the program one may continue editing the new program When selecting this option the CNC shows a list with all the programs already saved Keys for selecting a file a To switch windows Panes To close and open a folder submenu Z T To move the cursor thru the elements of the window PF To save the new program ESC To cancel the selection and close the program listing To save a program with another name 1 Select the destination folder 2 Write the program name in the bottom window To replace an existing program select it from the list 3 Press ENTER to save the program or ESC to return to the
162. g or continuous jog w In handwheel mode it selects the multiplying factor for the handwheel pulses x1 x10 o x100 In incremental mode it selects the incremental value of the axis movements Feedrate override selector To select the override percentage to be applied to the programmed and jog feedrates between 0 and 200 CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x Spindle control It is used to govern the spindle It consists of the following keys Start the spindle clockwise To stop the spindle Start the spindle counterclockwise To vary the spindle speed percentually Spindle orientation Execution keys Cycle start key It executes the program selected in the execution mode regardless of the active work mode except for MDI mode If the program has been interrupted it resumes its execution If MDI mode is active it executes the block just edited Cycle stop key It interrupts the execution of the program or the MDI block RESET key It initializes the system setting the initial conditions as defined by machine parameters Single block execution mode It selects the single block execution mode When this mode is active the execution of the program is interrupted at the end of each block J3 HA E ZERO Home search It is used to reference home one or several axes at the same time using a subroutine External devices The functions of these keys are defined by
163. ge and error table into a file in ASCII format MEF The contents of the table may be saved at the CNC ina floppy disk or in another CNC or PC via Ethernet Load b It recovers the table values saved earlier in the hard disk of the CNC Print PLC Messages service It prints the message and error table out to a printer connected to the CNC or as a file PRN format at the CNC New message It is used to define a new message in the table New error It is used to define a new error in the table Select information It selects the file for additional information Delete It deletes the selected message or error from the table FAGOR 8070 CNC Sort V03 0x 249 11 PLC Messages service FAGOR 8070 CNC Sort V03 0x 250 11 13 2 Editing the message and error table Messages To add anew message to the table press the New message softkey The CNC adds a new row to the table and it identifies it with the label MSG indicating that it corresponds to a message To edit or modify the table data use the cursor to select the cell whose value is to be changed and define the data as follows e The number and text of the message is entered directly from the keyboard e The show option is turned on and off with the SPACE key e The file for additional information may be entered directly or may be selected with the Select Info softkey Keys for defining the data
164. ger conditions and the machine parameters of the CNC or the drive that may be modified Operating procedure Execute a part program to move the axis or axes to be adjusted Once the program is running go into the adjustment mode and access the oscilloscope function Define the variables to be analyzed the trigger conditions and the machine parameters of the CNC or the drive that may be modified a a When capturing 1 or 2 variables of the same drive the capture will be done by the drive itself and the CNC will be in charge of drawing the results When capturing more than 2 variables or 2 variables from different drives in order to synchronize data the capture will be done by the CNC and the sampling period will be the CNC s cycle time Data capture and later analysis of the data Once the data capture has been interrupted or completed it is possible to analyze the signals and modify the parameters that have been previously selected in order to improve the machining conditions Repeat the capture the analysis and the modification of parameters until obtaining the best machining conditions Recommendations Execute endless repetitive movements After adjusting the axes individually readjust the interpolating axes together The user must determine which is the best adjustment the oscilloscope function is just an assistance tool Operation To enter or modify a data on the screens it must be selected in other words it
165. gning a value to a variable A 34 234 Reference to a variable Sin A 2 Asingle expression may contain both assignment and reference operations Use the character as separator A 34 234 Sin A 2 isthe same as Sin A 34 234 2 T The values ofthe calculator variables A Z are independent from the values of local parameters A Z also called PO through P25 Constants The following constants are available and they may be accessed from the softkey menu PI Value of pi 3 14159 MM gt INCHES mm inch conversion factor INCHES gt MM inch mm conversion factor Various operations In the following examples the x and y values indicate any valid combination of constants variables or expressions Binary operations AND Binary AND 1001 AND 1010 1000 OR Binary OR 1001 OR 1010 1011 XOR Exclusive OR 1001 XOR 1010 0011 NOT Inverse NOT 101 1 1010 N Calculator HOW TO OPERATE THE CNC FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 27 Calculator HOW TO OPERATE THE CNC FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 28 Arithmetic operations x y Add x y Subtract x y Multiply x y Divide x y Percentage 10 50 5 xy Power 23 2 2 2 8 x Factor 38 3 2 1 6 Trigonometric operations SIN x Sine SIN 30 0 5 COS x Cosine COS 60 0 5 TAN x Tangent TAN 45 1 INV SIN x Arc sine InvSin 0 5 30 INV COS x Arc cosine InvCos 0 5 60 INV TAN x Arc tangent InvTan 1 45 Conversi
166. graphic representation Use the CLEAR softkey to delete the graph It deletes the graph and the data shown over it It may be pressed at any time even while it is being drawn 13 3 6 Adjustment of the machine parameters involved The best adjustment of the backlash peak may require modifying the value of certain machine parameters This may be done directly in this window thus without having to go to the machine parameter table When turning the CNC on it assumes the new values in the CNC tables and or in the drive tables accordingly When changing these values the changes are effective immediately and are assumed by the CNC until the unit is turned off Once the setup is completed the changes must be validated so they can be effective next time the CNC is turned on g o The parameters may be modified before or during the test W D 9 2g qn i E g Selection of the parameters to be displayed 2 i MS 2 It is possible to interact with up to 11 different machine parameters Some of these 5 parameters are always visible but some may be defined at will However the CNC T z will only admit the valid parameters for this type of adjustment 2 3 BACKLASH e BAKANOUT Additional velocity command pulse BAKTIME Duration of the additional velocity command pulse To see the whole list of parameters that may be defined see section 13 3 8 Machine parameters that may be modified When using Fagor Sercos
167. h axis One to jog the axis in the positive direction and another one to move it in the negative direction To move a single axis press the axis key and the one for its jogging direction Type II There is a key for each axis and two keys for moving direction common to all the axes To jog an axis requires activating both the axis key and the moving direction There are two options depending on how the jog keyboard has been configured e The axis will move while both keys are pressed the axis key and the direction key e When pressing the axis key the key remains active The axis will move while the direction key is kept pressed To de select the axis press ESC or STOP Feedrates The movement is carried out at the feedrate defined by the OEM The feedrate may be varied between 0 and 200 using the feedrate override switch on the operator panel v Continuous JOG In continuous jog the axes keep moving while the jog keyboard is acted upon Continuous jog allows moving several axes at the same time Proceed as follows M 1 Turn the jog selector switch of the operator panel to the continuous jog position Las N on the dial ee 2 Jog the desired axis using the JOG panel keypad The axis will move while acting 4 a CP w upon the JOG panel a If while moving a second axis is selected the new one will move at the same time and under the same conditions If while the axes are moving the rapid key is pressed
168. hat have been created using the profile editor and are related to the pockets of the conversational canned cycles This directory saves the part programs created by the user who may create new subdirectories and store the programs in a more orderly fashion This directory saves the profiles that have been created using the profile editor and are related to conversational canned cycles This directory saves the bmp files generated when printing a graphic image to a file It also saves the reports prn format generated in the Diagnosis mode HOW TO OPERATE THE CNC 2 1 Screen description The CNC screens shows the following information A General CNC status bar It shows the information on the program being executed the active operating mode and the PLC messages See Detailed description of the CNC status bar on page 14 Screen for the active work mode The information shown in this area depends on the active work mode automatic jog etc The information shown in each work mode is described in the relevant chapter Vertical softkey menu icons The menu options change depending on the active work mode The different options are selected using softkeys F8 through F12 This menu may be placed either on the left or on the right of the screen Horizontal softkey menu The menu options change depending on the active work mode The different options are selected using softkeys F1 through F7 FAGOR 2 CN
169. he Installation Manual Warning The information described in this manual may be changed due to technical modifications FAGOR AUTOMATION S Coop reserves the right to make any changes to the contents of this manual without prior notice FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x ABOUT THE PRODUCT Software options Bear in mind that some of the features described in this manual depend on the software options that are installed Number of execution channels Number of axes Number of spindles Number of tool magazines COCOM version Sercos digital drive system Tool radius compensation C axis RTCP transformation High speed machining HSC Probing canned cycles Tandem axes Synchronism and cams GP model 1to4 4 to 28 1to4 1to4 Option Standard Option Not available Not available Option Option Option Not available M model 1to4 4 to 28 1to4 1to4 Option Standard Standard Standard Option Option Option Option Option T model 1to4 4 to 28 1to4 1to4 Option Standard Standard Not available Option Option Option Option Option FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x VERSION HISTORY Here is a list of the features added in each software version and the manuals that describe them The version history uses the following abreviations INST Installation manual PRG Programming manual OPT Operation manual Software V01 01 February of 2002 First version Softwa
170. he behavior of the logic signals of the PLC program depending on atime base and triggering conditions set by the user Monitor the status of PLC resources and variables See all the resources used in the PLC project and in which program of the project they are being used Run statistics on execution times of the PLC project and of the modules that form it Edit modify or view the texts associated with the messages and errors of the PLC FAGOR 8070 CNC Sort V03 0x 217 PLC Appearance of the PLC mode FAGOR 8070 CNC Sort V03 0x 218 Appearance of the PLC mode When this operating mode is active it will be indicated at the top right side of the general status bar This operating mode may be displayed with several screens Each of them corresponds to a PLC service The exchange between the different services is carried out with the list of services The different services overlap each other If several services active it is possible to switch from one to another using the relevant key if it has been set accordingly The services are switched in a rotary manner in such a way that when pressing on the last active service it shows the first one Standard configuration The standard configuration of this work mode described in this manual corresponds to the one supplied by Fagor In some cases the manual shows a sample screen instead of that of the CNC in order to make it easier to unders
171. he cursor through the elements of the list To confirm the option selected with the cursor If when defining the folder name there is already a folder with the same name it will NOT create the new folder 10 2 7 Protection passwords The passwords may be used to define each of the codes that the user will have to enter in order to access certain CNC functions If entered correctly it stores it and it does not request it again unless the CNC is turned off If the password is wrong the requested action cannot be carried out and it requests it again every time Press the Passwords softkey to access the password setting screen The following passwords may be defined e General password e PLC en e Machine parameters uw gt wd Qa gt e Customizing z 2 e Machine parameters for kinetics a 3 E 8 E E General password 235 It is requested when trying to access this password setting screen PLC It is requested when trying to carry out the following actions at the PLC e Editing the PLC program When entering the wrong password the PLC program opens as read only e Adding a file to the project e Deleting a file e Renaming a file e Editing PLC messages When entering the wrong password the PLC messages may be neither displayed nor edited e Generate PLC e When accessing to the Commands service options e In monitoring when modifying the status of a resource Machine parameters Itis reque
172. he data Order sequence to follow when loading the tables one by one This way each table is selected and its data loaded In this case the following sequence must be followed when loading the tables 1 First load the tool table This table defines the system tools Loading the tool table initializes the tables of the magazines and the active tools table 2 Second load the tool magazine tables Since the tool list has changed if the magazine tables are not loaded it is not possible to assure that the new tools are the ones located in the magazine tool or in the active tools table 3 Finally load the active tools table When loading the tables of magazines it is unsure that the current tool positions will be compatible with the active tools TOOL AND MAGAZINE TABLE Showing tables and common operations FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 175 O O O Operating manual 9 1 4 Printing the tables Some of the tables may be printed in a printer accessible from the CNC or as a file PRN format When the tables are saved as a file it may be saved at the CNC in a floppy disk or at any other device CNC PC etc connected through Ethernet By default the files are saved in the folder C CNC8070 USERS Reports In either case the action is carried out from the vertical softkey menu using the following icon 9 This icon starts printing When pressing this icon the CNC will show a a dialog box requ
173. he instructions that are not being executed such as the first cycle or those subroutines whose call is not active The default colors are Red Active variables Green Instruction that is not being executed Black Inactive variable or comment C Data entry area It is used to modify the values of the PLC resources FAGOR 8070 CNC Sort V03 0x 229 PLC Program monitoring softkeys FAGOR 8070 CNC Sort V03 0x 230 11 6 Program monitoring softkeys When selecting the Monitoring option of the softkey menu the following options will appear Monitoring Size Every time this softkey is pressed the size of the text will increase Monitoring Size Every time this softkey is pressed the size of the text will decrease Monitoring Bold When selecting this option the text of the program appears in bold Monitoring OFF ON It interrupts and resumes program monitoring While monitoring is interrupted the resource status changes are not updated Interrupting the monitoring does not stop the execution of the PLC Monitoring Find To find text in a program When selecting this option the CNC shows a dialog box requesting the text to be found Key in the text and press ENTER to begin the search Find FIND Find what Ea To search for the next program in descending order To search for the previous program in ascending order ESC To end the search and c
174. he main program PRG once The CNC does not execute this option when the PLC program is running Commands Resume It resumes the cyclic execution of the PLC program The CNC does not execute this option when the PLC program is running Commands PE module It executes the periodic module PE once The CNC does not execute this option when the PLC program is running b ol PLC Commands service FAGOR 8070 CNC Sort V03 0x 231 11 8 Outputs service The Outputs service shows the following information e The result of generating compiling the PLC program e The result of analyzing a file of mnemonics e The result of text search in the files making up the PLC project Pressing the Show softkey accesses the screen of this service that shows this 1 1 information To close the window press ESC E O 8 Description of the outputs service 7 2 The screen of this service looks like this Q OUTPUT FIND IN FILES INFO ARCHING FOR DM RESULT pleprg ple 22 DM43 GEAR3 7 ocurrence s have been found A Title bar It shows the type of information displayed in the window information about the compilation file analysis or a search B Requested information It shows the requested information FAGOR 8070 CNC SOFT V03 0x 232 11 8 1 Options of the Outputs service When accessing the Outputs service the softkeys will show the following option Outp
175. he previous path a be a Validate To accept and draw the defined section l z The data is defined in the data area of the screen where the following information is D shown 2 X1 Y1 Coordinates of the section s starting point They cannot be modified because they G belong to the endpoint of the previous section X2 Y2 Coordinates of the section s endpoint Xc Coordinates of the section s center along the abscissa axis Yc Coordinates of the section s center along the ordinate axis RADIUS Radius of the arc TANGENCY It indicates whether or not the section is tangent to the previous path FAGOR CNC 8070 SoFT V03 0x 142 6 9 7 Modify a profile and insert corners To modify the defined profiles by either modifying or deleting the existing elements or inserting new elements Likewise it is possible to insert rounding chamfers and tangential entries or exits When selecting this option the softkey menu will show the necessary options to modify the profile O Modify element It is possible to modify any data of a section of the profile SH Once the desired element has been selected one may modify the type of section straight or arc or its data Once the element has been modified press Validate to confirm the changes The CNC recalculates the new profile according to the data used to define that section and the next one tangency angle etc Profile editor O Insert element To insert a new element in any posi
176. he program listing The program window will show the contents of the selected subroutine Last block It sets as execution interrupting block the one currently selected with the cursor If the last block is not set the program execution will end executing one of the end of program functions M02 or M30 The last block may be selected using the cursor orthe Find text or Go to line options of the softkey menu Keys to move the cursor i Moves the cursor line by line B To move the cursor page by page cea aliases Moves the cursor to the first block or to the end of the program The set last block remains active until canceled with ESC key or until the program is executed in that case the execution will end in one of functions M02 or M30 O O O Operating manual Number of times It sets as stop condition that the block selected as the last block has been executed a specific number of times When selecting this option the CNC requests the number of times that the block must be executed before ending the execution of the program After entering the number of times press ENTER to validate the value or ESC to cancel it AUTOMATIC MODE Data screen softkeys ioe FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 43 AUTOMATIC MODE Data screen softkeys FAGOR CNC 8070 SoFT V03 0x 44 3 3 3 Block search E With this option itis possible in a program or subr
177. he screen the profile will automatically be centered and zoomed in or out to show the whole profile This way it will show the whole profile again O Validate It may be used to confirm the changes made SH a 2 O D vo Ze O 2 E A lt q ad p oO Q W FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 145 6 9 9 Work plane definition The softkey menu of this screen may be used to modify the axes of the plane and their directions When accessing the plane menu the softkey menu shows the following options O Abscissa axis For selecting the abscissa axis among X Y and Z O Abscissa direction 6 E For selecting the direction of the abscissa axis between and O Ordinate axis For selecting the ordinate axis among X Y and Z O Ordinate direction Profile editor For selecting the direction of the ordinate axis between and O Validate It may be used to confirm the changes made EDITING SIMULATION MODE FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 146 ry F ry A Onearating maniial 7 CO C Operating manual 6 9 10 End It ends the profile editing session When selecting this option the softkey menu shows the following options O Save profile It inserts the profile in the program and exits the profile editor O Do not save profile It does not insert the profile in the program and it exits the profile editor O Continue It does not insert the profile in the program and it goes on editing profi
178. hed line The cursor currently selected will appear in red Keys to move the cursors E To move the selected cursor HEI To select the cursor to be moved The dialog area will show the coordinates of both cursors the distance between them on the straight line and the components of that distance on the axes of the active plane The coordinates of the selected cursor will appear in red AUTOMATIC MODE Graphic screen softkeys ioe When selecting this option the softkey menu shows the available options To return to the main menu press the key for the previous menu Measurement Point1 amp Point2 It is used to select the cursor to be moved same as using the key Measurement Edit It is used to manually edit the position of the cursors It is edited in the dialog area of the graphic window that shows the position of both cursors Keys for defining the measurement 2 2 To move the cursor through the data To validate the selected position of the cursors 3 5 6 Clear screen It is used to clear the screen or delete the graphics displayed If a solid graphic type is selected the graphic representation will be reset and it will return to its initial state without machining FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 53 3 5 7 Colors It is used to change the colors used in the graphic representation O Path colors When a line graphics is active the following colors may be defined The color to
179. hen printing to a file it is possible to select the name and location of the file Print destination SELECT PRINT DESTINATION x PRINTER lt To select the print destination To print the drawing ESC To cancel the printing After selecting the destination press ENTER to print the table or ESC to cancel it g p to p ESC FAGOR 8070 CNC Sort V03 0x 245 11 12 Statistics service The Statistics service may be used to obtain information about the execution times of the PLC and the files making up the PLC project Pressing the Show softkey access the service screen Toclose the statistics screen press ESC mmh h Description The screen of this service looks like this PLC Statistics service STATISTICS PLC Proccess m 118 us 14 us 4000 us FILES Size Type Modified LI PLCPRG PLC 2KB IL source file 15 12 2000 14 30 32 A Execution time table This table shows the following data from left to right e Modules making up the PLC program e Minimum module execution time e Maximum module execution time e Average module execution time e Module execution frequency B PLC file table This table shows the following data from left to right e Files making up the PLC project e Size of each file e File type e Date last modified FAGOR 8070 CNC Sort V03 0x 246 O O O Operation manual 11 12 1 Options of the Statistics service
180. hen selecting this option the CNC shows a dialog box requesting the line number or the text to look for When defining a text search certain options may also be defining that allow A Replacing the text being searched with another in the program B Ignore uppercase and lowercase C Consider the text to find as a whole word D Select whether the search starts at the beginning of the program or at the cursor position Find replace FIND 7 REPLACE GOTO LINE FIND TEXT G REPLACE WITH M MATCH CASE O I MATCH WHOLE WORD ONLY START 0 BEGINNING CURSOR To move the cursor through the elements of the list SPACE To activate deactivate the selection box B C To select an option of a group D ENTER To start the search ESC To cancel the search and close the dialog box After defining the search options press ENTER to start the search or ESC to cancel it The text found in the program will be highlighted and the softkey menu will show the following options e Replace to replace the highlighted text e Replace all to replace the text throughout the whole program e Find next to skip this text and keep on searching To end the search press ESC 6 3 6 Customizing To customize the appearance and the properties of the editing window When selecting this option the softkey menu shows the available options To return to the main menu
181. hows the options for section 8 End of editing Tangency Yes The CNC shows the options for section 1 Tangency Yes Tangency Yes Center Y 110 The CNC shows the options for section 3 The CNC shows the options for section 2 Tangency Yes Radius 20 Select the correct one Radius 25 Tangency Yes Select the correct one Select the correct one Tangency Yes Select the correct one Tangency Yes Select the correct one Tangency Yes Select the correct one Radius 30 Tangency Yes Select the correct one Tangency Yes Select the correct one Select the END option and save the profile The CNC quits the profile editor and inserts the profile in the part program MDI MODE MDI mode selection The MDI mode may be accessed from any other operating mode except when a program is in execution even it is interrupted by pressing its relevant key This work mode may be accessed from any channel The blocks are executed in the active channel The MDI mode lays over all the other work modes in such a way that when quitting the MDI mode by pressing ESC the CNC goes into the work mode from where the MDI mode was accessed Operations in MDI mode The following operations are possible in this work mode e Edit and execute individual blocks e Save the set of blocks executed as an independent program FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 151 MDI MODE Appearance of the MDI mode F
182. ializing the tables eliminates all the tools from the list It also initializes the active tools table and the magazine tables because the available tools have been erased Save table It saves the table data ina file See 9 1 3 Save and load the tables on page 174 2 O O Operating manual Recall table It recalls the table data previously saved in a file See 9 1 3 Save and load the tables on page 174 Bear in mind that loading the tool table initializes the magazine tables and the active tools table Print table Ez It prints the contents of the table out to a printer connected to the CNC or as a file 9 m PRN format at the CNC See 9 1 4 Printing the tables on page 176 43 os lar O W gt N lt 0 lt Q z lt al O O Ee FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 179 9 2 2 The tool list The tool list appears on the left panel of the tool table The list shows the available tools and their position The CNC updates data of the list every time a tool change is carried out Tool number It is assigned automatically when the tool is added to the list It may be modified by 9 the user in the data window m Tool name wW D g Name identifying the tool defined by the user in the data window It may be edited directly on the list w z p N Tool position lt g It indicates the position of the tool in a magazine in the spindle or in the claws of p the tool changer arm C1 C4
183. ibration Calibration with a probe FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 85 MANUAL JOG MODE TOOL CALIBRATION Automatic calibration with a probe and a canned cycle FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 86 5 3 5 3 1 Automatic calibration with a probe and a canned cycle Mill or lathe model trihedron geometrical configuration This option is only available when using a tabletop probe installed on the machine This mode may be used to calibrate both milling and lather tools The CNC will show the necessary data and will update the help graphics according to the selected tool T 3 i F 500 PRBIMAX 10 PRB2MAX 0 PRB3MAX 10 PRBIMIN 0 PRE2MIN 0 PRB3MIN 0 Program T D fill in the cycle data and press START A Machine data is optionally shown Position of the axes tool and active tool offset real spindle speed and real feedrate of the axes B Area to define the calibration data C Probe position Tool calibration The calibration is done using a probing canned cycle The CNC moves the tool until touching the probe and validates the calibration on each axis The tool may be calibrated on both axes of the plane or on the three axes of the trihedron The calibration begins when pressing the CYCLE START key When the CNC finishes the calibration on the selected axes it updates the dimensions and the wears Them the new values are saved in the tool table The horizontal
184. icular axis permits executing each layer in the desired Z coordinate or that of the relevant perpendicular axis Work plane The work plane must be defined before importing the file in the part program The plane is defined by selecting the abscissa axis the ordinate axis and the perpendicular axis When importing it in the profile editor the plane will be the one selected at the editor and only the perpendicular axis can be selected 6 2 3 Syntax errors when editing The syntax errors occurred while editing or after running a syntax check will be displayed at the bottom of editing window To toggle the cursor between the editor and the error listing press the key combination CTRL TAB EXAMPLE G71 G94 T3 M6 1000 M3 G X 30 30 210 G01 Z 10 F300 G42 X30 Y30 F650 G37 120 x70 Y70 x30 30 638 120 G40 X 30 Y 30 G01 2 20 F300 G42 x20 Y20 F650 G37 120 x80 Yeo x20 Y20 G38 120 a coc ec 3 E2 Syntax error Unexpected X 16 E56 Unknown or incomplete word Errors while editing While editing each block is analyzed when entered If a syntax error is detected in the block the error window will display the following information e Position of the error in the block e Error number and explanatory text Errors after a syntax check The syntax check is executed from the icon menu The syntax check checks all the blocks of the program If a syntax error is detected the erro
185. ifiable and hidden files Only the letters of the attributes currently selected will be shown Those not selected will appear as _ H The file is hidden and it willnot appear when selecting a program for editing or execution Remember that a hidden file can still be deleted if its name is known To prevent that if so wished its modifiable attribute should be removed M The file may be modified in other words edited copied deleted etc Select files from the list To copy rename delete etc the files must be previously selected on the list A file may be selected from the list e Move the cursor with the relevant keys e Using the alphanumeric keyboard pressing a key will select the first element starting with that letter Pressing it again will select the second one and so on e Using the file search option of the softkey menu permits looking for all the files that contain the indicated text Keys to select a folder To switch windows folders or files Q To move the cursor thru the elements of the window B gt To move the cursor page by page ee rere To move the cursor to the beginning or end of the list To select a group of files keep the SHIFT key pressed while the moving the cursor To add or remove a file from the selection keep the CTRL key pressed and place the cursor on the file and press SPACE key n UTILITIES MODE Appearance of the utilities mo
186. ignals Speed enable Drive enable Error Reset LSC Status DR OK PROG OK Master Speed Enable Master Drive Enable Master Halt Torque Status Inputs and outputs that may be assigned Variables and or parameters of the drive may be associated with inputs and outputs analog and digital Those digital outputs that have not been associated with any parameter or variable may be forced to become active or inactive using the button on the left of their led O O O Operating manual 14 9 Command generator of the drive In the configuration it is possible to establish the shape of the signal its amplitude period etc This option may be used to configure and start up the internal command generator RAY GENERATOR SPINDLE S Selected drive WAVEFORM oma e AMPLITUDE FREQUENCY Configuration of the command OFFSET generator WAVES DDSSETUP Command generator DUTY CYCLE Turn the command generator on The fields to be configured at the generator are Shape To select the type of signal to be generated with the drive sinusoidal or square Amplitude Signal amplitude Frequency Signal frequency Offset Signal Offset Waves Number of waves to generate When set to 0 zero the waves are generated continuously without interruption Duty Cycle Percentage of the wave at 1 0 only on squarewaves The internal command generator is turned on and off using the lower buttons f It turns the c
187. ilable in all work modes This window may be expanded using the key combination ALT S The synchronization is carried out using marks in the programs The window shows for each channel whether itis waiting for synchronization marks or not and the status of those marks in the channel that originates them The different color LED s of the window show the status of the synchronization marks of each channel On the left the channels waiting for the marks and on top the channels that originate them White No synchronization mark expected 2 Green Synchronization mark expected The mark is setto 1 in the channel that originates it Red Synchronization mark expected The mark is set to 0 in the channel that originates it AUTOMATIC MODE Displaying the automatic mode gt cH In the graphic the white LED s are identified CH2 with the letter W the green ones with the letter w W W W _ G and the red ones with the letter R CH3 CH4 w w The previous graph shows for example e Channel 1 CH1 is expecting synchronism marks from the rest of the channels The marks of channels 2 and 4 are set to 1 The mark of channel 3 is set to 0 e Channel 2 CH2 is not expecting any synchronism mark FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 37 r O O O Operating manual AUTOMATIC MODE Displaying the automatic mode FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 38 Icon description vertic
188. ined point of view ESC To cancel the defined point of view Graphic window softkeys EDITING SIMULATION MODE FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 121 EDITING SIMULATION MODE Graphic window softkeys FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 122 6 5 5 Measurement To measure the distance between two points This option is only available for the types of graphics XY XZ YZ and Solid 3D When selecting this option the section being measured will appear on the graphics with two cursors and a dashed line The cursor currently selected will appear in red Keys to move the cursors T To move the selected cursor cuig To select the cursor to be moved The dialog area will show the coordinates of both cursors the distance between them on the straight line and the components of that distance on the axes of the active plane The coordinates of the selected cursor will appear in red When selecting this option the softkey menu shows the available options To return to the main menu press the key for the previous menu Measurement Pointi amp Point2 It is used to select the cursor to be moved same as using the key Measurement Edit It is used to manually edit the position of the cursors It is edited in the dialog area of the graphic window that shows the position of both cursors Keys for defining the measurement 0 Z To move the cursor through the data To validate
189. ing this option the CNC shows a list of trace files TRC already saved To save the current configuration 1 Define the file name at the bottom window To replace an existing file select it from the list 2 Press ENTER to save the configuration or ESC to return to the logic analyzer b without saving the configuration 8 Load the configuration 8 It is used to recover a logic analyzer configuration that has been stored earlier g When selecting this option the CNC shows a list of trace files TRC already saved 5 To load one of these files D 1 Define the file name at the bottom window or select it from the list 2 Press ENTER to save the configuration or ESC to return to the logic analyzer without loading the configuration Initialize the configuration Itis used to reset all the analyzer data eliminating the defined variables or expressions as well as the trigger condition and trigger type The traces are also deleted because there are no variables to be analyzed FAGOR 8070 CNC Sort V03 0x 237 h PLC Logic analyzer service FAGOR 8070 CNC Sort V03 0x 238 11 9 3 Execute and analyze trace Execute trace Stop trace It used to start or stop the data capture to display the traces Analyze trace It is used to analyze the different graphic aspects of the trace When selecting this option the softkey menu shows the options available for analyzing the trace
190. inning of the table or at the current cursor position 8 Find text E TEXT USER TABLES Operations with tables START BEGINNING C CURSOR To move the cursor through the elements of the list It selects an option from a group To start the search ESC To cancel the search and close the dialog box FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 170 TOOL AND MAGAZINE TABLE Selecting the tool tables and magazine tables The CNC tables may be accessed from any other operating mode even while a program is in execution by pressing the key for these tables They may be divided into the following tables e Tool table e Active tools table e Table for the status of the tool change process e Tool magazine tables In order to load a tool in the magazine or in the spindle that tool must have been previously defined in the corresponding table of the CNC What can you do in this work mode The following operations are possible in this work mode e Editing and modifying the tool table e Display and manage the tool arrangement in the magazines and in the tool changing arms if any e Display the information about the tool change process the operation carried out when executing an M06 manager status change status in execution or at rest magazine involved in the change if the change is taking place and whether the change process is or not in an error state e Load and u
191. ion TOOL AND MAGAZINE TABLE Description of the tool data The tool data is grouped as follows e Tool identification e Tool geometry e Tool monitoring e Information for the magazine e Custom e Comment Keys for selecting the table data 4 It selects the previous and next data of the same group It selects the first data of the previous or next group Tool identification Information identifying the tool number name family number of tool offsets and status Tool number FAGOR It is assigned automatically when the tool is added to the list This number may be changed if it is not in the magazine in the spindle or on the tool changer arm CNC 8070 The tool number may be any integer between 1 and 999999999 by default it is assigned the first available value on the list When entering an existing tool number the CNC displays the data for that tool Sort V03 0x 181 Tool table TOOL AND MAGAZINE TABLE FAGOR CNC 8070 SoFT V03 0x 182 Tool name Name identifying the tool This data can also be defined on the tool list The tool name may be up to 32 characters long Tool family A tool family is a group of tools that share similar characteristics This information is used when using an automatic tool changer so the CNC can replace the worn out or rejected tool with a similar one When requesting a new tool the CNC checks whether it is worn out
192. ist of icons Display units millimeters inches To toggle between the two types of units used to represent the parameters that depend on those units coordinates feedrates etc The icon highlights the units currently selected millimeters or inches Initialize table It resets all the parameters to their default values The CNC will request confirmation of the command Find text It is used to find a text or a value in the table When selecting this option the CNC shows a dialog box requesting the text to be found Validate table For validating the table data If there is no table selected all the data of all the tables will be validated This table is necessary after changing a data In certain cases the CNC will have to turned off and back on in order for the data to be validated Save tool It saves the values of the table into a file If there is no table selected all the data of all the tables will be saved This file may be saved at the CNC in a floppy disk or at another CNC or PC connected through Ethernet Recall table It restores the values of the table previously saved into a file If there is no table selected all the data of all the tables will be recalled Print table It prints the contents of the table out to a printer connected to the CNC or as a file PRN format at the CNC O O O Operating manual Activate TEACH IN It is used for activating the TEACH IN work mode in order to set the
193. ith the three resource files used last This will let you recover one of them without having to define it again Pressing the Show softkey access the service screen If a file was selected from the list it will show the resources defined in it To close the monitoring window press ESC Description of the monitoring service This service screen is divided into several windows that may be accessed with the window switching key The monitoring screen looks like this MONITORING STATUS MON 00000000 00000000 0000000000 0000000000 0000000000 0000000000 0000000000 0000000000 oo00000000 0000000000 0000000000 Hoo0000000 0000000000 0000000000 0000000000 0000000000 0000000000 oo000000000 n000000000 n000000000 gt A Resources selected for monitoring It shows the user resources and symbols being analyzed They are shown grouped in the following tables Timers Counters Registers Binary resources Each of them shows information on the status of those resources B Data entry area It is used to define the user resources and symbols to be analyzed and modify their values by directly assigning a value to them Softkey menus When selecting this service the horizontal softkey menu will show all the options associated with resource monitoring The set of options offered by this menu may be changed using th
194. ition of the clamping system of the machine When applying a clamp offset the CNC assumes as new clamp zero the point set by the selected offset referred to machine reference zero home To apply a clamp offset it must be activated from the program using the relevant variable 2 O O Operating manual 8 4 Arithmetic parameter tables There are the following arithmetic parameter tables Common parameters e Global parameters There is a table for each channel e Local parameters There are seven tables for each channel one table per nesting level 7 levels The CNC generates a new nesting level for local parameters every time parameters are assigned to a subroutine GLOBAL P PARAMETERS 101 980390 oo awaa 20 000000 1 164153E 014 1 164153E 014 USER TABLES Arithmetic parameter tables 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Q A Parameter list B Parameter value The end of this chapter describes how to edit these tables Arithmetic parameters The OEM defines the range of local and global parameters up to a maximum of 100 local parameters PO P99 and 9900 global parameters P100 P9999 When the local parameters are used in a subroutine calling block they can also be referred to by the letters A Z except N in such a way that A is the same as PO and Z isthe same as P25 That is why the local parameter tables show the parameter number next to their associated letter The parameter values may be set directly in th
195. ivated with their associated softkey F8 to F12 The icon menu always shows all the icons related to this operating mode regardless of which window is active The group of options shown on this menu may be expanded with the softkey associated with the icon that offers a different set of options List of icons START simulation This icon will not be available while simulating a program It starts the program simulation or resumes it if it was interrupted During simulation the graphic window will show the graphic representation of the program being simulated STOP simulation This icon will only be available when simulating a program It interrupts program simulation Simulation will resume by pressing the START icon RESET simulation It cancels program simulation If an error occurs during simulation it eliminates the error status and returns the simulation mode to its initial conditions Channel change for the editing and simulation mode This icon will only be available when using channels It serves to change the channel being displayed for editing and simulation It does not affect the active channel at the CNC Continuous or single block mode It selects the single block or continuous mode either one may be selected even while executing a program When single block mode is active the icon will appear pressed program simulation will be interrupted at the end of each block When the automatic
196. jump It simulates the external block skip switch While active the blocks having the block skip character will be ignored not simulated Cancel channel synchronization There is one icon for each channel It cancels the channel synchronization wait periods during simulation When active the wait period will end immediately and it will resume the execution of the program Graphics window o gt C EDITING SIMULATION MODE FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 115 Graphics window EDITING SIMULATION MODE FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 116 6 4 2 Simulation errors When an error occurs the CNC will display a window describing the cause of the error These errors are displayed in the middle of the screen regardless of which window is active There are two types of errors The top of the window shows the category and it will have a different color depending on the type of error it shows WARNING They do not interrupt the simulation of the program The window that shows them may be removed by pressing ESC ERROR They interrupt the simulation of the program Although the window displaying them may be closed by pressing ESC it does not mean that the error status has been taken care of to do that press the RESET icon The program can be neither edited nor simulated while the error stays state active 6 5 Graphic window softkeys 6 5 1 Type of graphics To select the type of g
197. kes the cursor to the trigger If there is no trigger it will go to the center of the window Moves the cursor to the left Moves the cursor to the right Focus on the parameter name field As with variables by selecting the various parameters it is possible to change their names and values When pressing Enter after changing the name of a parameter use the up down left and right arrow keys to move the focus to the next field to change the value of that parameter After changing the parameter value and pressing Enter the focus does not go on to the next field Use the arrow keys to go on to the next parameter When the focus is on this field the 4 vertical softkeys will be It increases the value of the parameter in the amount indicated on the configuration screen It decreases the value of the parameter in the amount indicated on the configuration screen It resets the parameter to its default value It validates the value given to the parameter EEE _ SE ee From the CONFIG mode a screen may be accessed where it is possible to define the list of parameters to be displayed 13 1 2 Configuration screen The configuration screen may be accessed with the horizontal softkey CONFIG This screen looks like this with two clearly different areas The left side shows the data of the variables to be displayed the trigger data and the time base The right
198. key e Not selected and visible The axis is displayed in the TEACH IN window but it is not included in the blocks being edited by pressing the RECALL key e Not selected and not visible The axis is neither displayed in the TEACH IN window nor included in the blocks being edited by pressing the RECALL key After defining the behavior of the axes press ENTER to accept the selection or ESC to reject it Show Hide cycles and profiles It is used for selecting whether the contents of the conversational canned cycles and profiles will be shown or hidden in the program e Ifthe Show option is active it will show the full contents of the canned cycle and the profile e If the Hide option is active only the name of the canned cycle and the profile will be shown 6 3 7 Profile editor It is used for accessing the profile editor 2 O O Operating manual When selecting this option the softkey menu shows the profile editor options To return to editing the program press End DISPLAY AREA Editing window softkeys Gp EDITING SIMULATION MODE The profile editor may also be accessed by selecting a profile in the program and pressing RECALL The section on 6 9 Profile editor of this chapter offers a more detailed description on how to use the profile editor FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 109 Editing window softkeys EDITING SIMULATION MODE FAGOR CN
199. l circle e Scale or value in microns of each division e Error margin Percentage of the area that is occupied by the error margin divisions area Initialize the data When accessing the circularity test it assumes the values used last Pressing the INITIALIZEsoftkey restores the default values Number of divisions 5 Scale 10 microns division Error margin 50 eee Eee Bear in mind that the softkey INITIALIZE initializes all the data of the window including the values of the machine parameters 13 3 4 Define and execute the movement subroutine In order to run the test the axes of the machine must be executing a circular interpolation The axes must be moving before initiating the point capture and they must keep moving during the whole process To achieve this a repetitive movement must be executed UUN The movement of the axes is managed from the operator panel The softkey menu only controls the data capture for the graphics Subroutine associated with the circularity test The circular interpolation is executed with the subroutine associated with the circularity test This subroutine is located in the folder C CNC8070 MTB SUB testcirc_vx nc where vx indicates the subroutine version and neither its name nor its location must be changed This subroutine may be modified by the OEM to adapt it to his needs Some data of the subroutine are defined in this window e Plane where the circle is executed e Ci
200. lay the values of that set Also its identifier will show the selected set e g for set 4 of the variable SP2 it will show SP2 4 Parameters with a set will not be affected by the change List of variables and parameters The list of variables and parameters offers the following information e Mnemonic of the variable or of the parameter e Current value at the drive e Units being used e Valid range of values If itis a string of characters it will show the maximum length permitted e Sercos identifier e Name of the variable or of the parameter Editing the values The values of parameters or variables with write permission are edited in the Value field If the new value is accepted the list shows the change The changes are saved in the drive s RAM memory To save the change permanently use the DATA FLASH option of the horizontal menu ox a DDSSETUP Parameters and variables service FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 305 O O O Operating manual How to make a backup copy of the data The DATA softkey of the horizontal menu offers a series of options to make a backup copy of the values e The SAVE softkey saves the values of the parameters and variables into a file e The LOAD softkey restores the values of the parameters and variables from a previously saved file m DDSSETUP F Parameters and variables service FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 306 14 6 Er
201. le If the profile has been resolved the CNC will insert it in the part program that is being edited If the profile cannot be resolved due to lack of data the CNC will issue the relevant message Profile editor e gt E EDITING SIMULATION MODE FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 147 7 0O O Oneratina manya O O O Operating manual 6 9 11 Profile editor Example 1 Profile editor EDITING SIMULATION MODE Profile definition without rounding chamfers or tangential entries and exits Starting point X 80 Y 20 Straight X 80 Y 20 Straight X 20 Y 20 Straight X 20 Y 80 Straight X 60 Y 80 Counterclockwise arc X 100 Y 80 Straight X 140 Y 80 Straight X 140 Y 20 Straight X 80 Y 20 Straight X 80 Y 20 Center X 80 Center Y 80 Radius 20 Definition of rounding chamfers and tangential entries and exits Select the CORNERS option and define Tangential entry Chamfer Rounding Rounding Rounding Rounding Chamfer Tangential exit Select point 1 Select point 2 Select point 3 Select point 4 Select point 5 Select point 6 Select point 7 Select point 1 Assign radius 5 Assign size 10 Assign radius 10 Assign radius 5 Assign radius 5 Assign radius 10 Assign size 10 Assign radius 5 Press ENTER Press ENTER Press ENTER Press ENTER Press ENTER Press ENTER Press ENTER Press ENTER Press ESC to quit the COR
202. les from the CNC DRIVEVAR e Backlash peak compensation BAKANOUT BAKTIME ACTBAKAN The behavior of rotary axes has been changed Machine parameters AXISMODE INST UNIDIR SHORTESTWAY Possibility of Sercos transmission at 8 Mhz and 16 Mhz Parameter SERBRATE INST Define the anticipation time for the axes to be considered to be in position Machine INST parameter ANTIME and the PLC mark ADVINPOS The V TM MZWAIT variable is not necessary in the subroutine associated with MO6 INST Filters to eliminate the resonance of the spindle when it works as C axis or in rigid tapping INST PLC The TMOPERATION may take the values 13 and 14 INST PLC New mark MMCWDG to detect that the lockup of the operating system INST FAGOR PLC Accessing arithmetic parameters and OEM parameters with CNCRD returns the INST value multiplied by 10000 reading in float mode PLC The CNCEX command and the FREE mark to execute a CNC block CNC 8070 New commands at the PLC INST e New mark to disable the cross compensation tables DISCROSS e New mark to correct the parallelism on Gantry axes DIFFCOMP e Definition of external symbols PDEF New variables INST PRG SOFT V03 0x e Software version e Variables to be set via PLC e Variables for adjusting the position e Fine adjustment variables e Feedback inputs VI Feature Electronic cam editor INST Optimize the reading and writing of variables from the PLC Only the following will be a
203. ll remain active until another type is selected or the graphic display is deactivated or the CNC is turned off Likewise when changing the type of graphics the CNC will maintain the graphic conditions zoom graphic parameters display area etc defined for the last graphic When selecting this option the softkey menu shows the types of graphics available To return to the main menu press the key for the previous menu 3D lines Graphics It displays a three dimensional graph of the tool paths Sections Graphics It displays a top view XY plane of the part being executed and it shows the machining depths in different tones It also displays the XZ and YZ sections for the areas shown by the indicators of the top view These indicators may be moved around using the keys to display the different sections of the part The CNC shows dynamically the new section being selected The indicators may be moved at any time even while executing the program xy XZ yz graphics It displays the tool paths in the XY XZ or YZ plane Combined graphics It divides the display area in four quadrants and displays the tool path corresponding to each plane XY XZ YZ and to the 3D view Solid 3D Graphics It shows a 3D view of the part being machined Starting out with a 3D block which is machined as the program is executed AUTOMATIC MODE Graphic screen softkeys ioe FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 49
204. lose the dialog box As the text is being searched the cursor will position on the match found To end the search press ESC Monitoring Customize It is used to personalize certain functions of the monitoring window When selecting this option the CNC shows a dialog box with the options available for customizing 11 7 Commands service The Commands service is used to debug the PLC program execution by taking advantage of the possibility to execute the various parts of the program separately first cycle main module and periodic module This service also offers the possibility of starting up and interrupting the execution of the PLC program When selecting this service the horizontal softkey menu offers all the options associated with this service 11 7 1 Options of the Commands service softkeys Commands Run It starts the execution of the PLC program 1 The first cycle CY1 is executed once 2 Cyclic execution of the main program PRG and the periodic module PE The main program is executed according to the frequency defined by machine parameter The periodic module is executed according to the frequency defined in the program Commands Stop It interrupts the execution of the PLC program Commands CY1 It executes the part of the program corresponding to the first cycle CY1 The CNC does not execute this option when the PLC program is running Commands Cycle It executes t
205. m MONROTNO iaiia os eee cence ste arsar ekee 11 6 Program monitoring softkeys 11 7 Commands service seseeeeseeerierrerrerrerreen 11 7 1 Options of the Commands service softkeys ts 11 8 Outputs service oo ee ccc tee e ence eee aeee eee cane eeaeceteeaeeseaaaeeseaaaesesaeeeeesaaeeeeaaaeeenaeaeee 11 8 1 Options of the Outputs SCrViCe e eee cee ceeeeeeeee eee aeeeeeeeeeeaeeeseaaeeeseaeeeeeeaes 11 9 Logic analyzer service 0 11 9 1 Editing logic analyzer data 11 9 2 Save load and reset the analyzer configuration i 11 9 3 Execute and analyze trace s sssessessessrusresruueesrrueenssraeeasrnnenasranennrnnnenennaeenrnenen 11 9 4 Customize the appearance of the logic analyzer 11 10 Monitoring Service 11 10 1 Description of resource tables 11 10 2 Definition of the table resources X 11 10 3 Options of the Monitoring service softkeys erener 11 11 Cross references Service sesssssssrrssessrureesinnseerrareasrensanernnraesinsnastnansasrinensrnnnae 11 11 1 Options of the Cross reference service softkeys m 11 12 Statistics SCrviCe i civics sesssacececvecesdsccsecgveateaueecesiwssecacetesizecancasecunsandvaeasacadaai svete dens 11 12 1 Options of the Statistics service softkeys e ceeeceeeeee teens eeeeeeeeeteeeeeeneeees 11 13 Messages service ooo eee eect e reece 11 13 1 Options of the Messages service softkeys 11 13 2 Editing the messag
206. m percentages between which the speed may be varied as well as the percentage of variation every time one of these keys is pressed They are set using the following machine parameters MINOVR Minimum override MAXOVR Maximum override STEPOVR Override increment step O O O Operating manual 4 4 Tool selection and tool change The tool located in the spindle may be changed in manual mode Proceed as follows 1 Press T at the alphanumeric keyboard The CNC will highlight the current tool indicating that it is selected 2 Key in the number of the tool to be placed in the spindle 3 Press START to execute the tool change or ESC to cancel the operation gt MANUAL JOG MODE Tool selection and tool change FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 75 MANUAL JOG MODE Definition of cutting conditions FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 76 4 5 Definition of cutting conditions In jog mode it is possible to set the turning speed S and the feedrate F e The feedrate will correspond to the active feedrate e The speed entered will correspond to the master spindle of the active channel Proceed as follows 1 Press the S key on the alphanumeric keypad to select a spindle speed or the F key to select a feedrate The CNC will highlight the relevant data indicating that it is selected 2 Enter the desired spindle speed or feedrate 3 Press START to assume the entered value or ESC to cancel th
207. maniiz O O O Operating manual Calculator HOW TO OPERATE THE CNC FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 26 MN Softkey menu The softkey menu shows all the available operations The expressions may be edited using either the softkey menu or the mouse with the calculator keys Work units The result of the operations may be given in various units Use the following icons to change the units It highlights the units currently selected Hexadecimal decimal D or binary B units Units in degrees or radians 2 6 1 Defining expressions An expression may consist of one or more operations Each one of them may be defined by any valid combination of variables constants functions and operations Press ENTER To accept the expression entered and calculate the value Quick parenthesis insertion To place a portion of an expression between parenthesis select the portion and press one of the parenthesis keys or If while a portion of the expression is selected an operation key is pressed the selection will appear between parenthesis and it will be preceded by the operation just defined Example Having the expression 1 1 X 1 X 1 1 When selecting the 1 X 1 1 portion and pressing the SIN option the expression will become 141 X Sin 1 X 1 1 Variables for the calculator Up to 26 variables from A to Z except N may be used to store numeric values and use them later Assi
208. meters and variables DDSSetup mode selection The DDSSetup mode may be accessed either using the user key customized for it or from the tasks window The task window may be accessed with key combination CTRL A What can you do in this work mode In short this operating mode offers the following operations See the list of Sercos drives connected to the CNC Change the access level for drive parameters View and change the parameters and variables of the drives Display the list of errors being generated by the drive Monitor in real time the value of the drive variables View the status of the operation being carried out at the drive and the status of the digital inputs and outputs Generate velocity commands FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 297 O O O Operating manual m DDSSETUP fa Appearance of the DDSSetup mode FAGOR CNC 8070 SoFT V03 0x 298 14 1 Appearance of the DDSSetup mode When this operating mode is active it will be indicated at the top right side of the general status bar This operating mode consists of several services As these services are being activated they overlap each other If several services active it is possible to switch from one to another using the relevant key if it has been set accordingly The active services are switched in a rotary manner in such a way that when pressing on the last active service it shows the first one 2 O O Operating manu
209. n the CNC shows a dialog box requesting the text to be found Accessing the tables of other channels This icon will only be available when using channels Some tables only show the data of the active channel This icon gives access to the tables of the other channels Select axes It may be used to select the axes to be displayed in the tables When using several channels only those axes assigned to the active channel may be accessed Save tool It saves the values of the table into a file This file may be saved at the CNC in a floppy disk or at another CNC or PC connected through Ethernet USER TABLES Appearance of the table mode FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 163 2 O O Operating manual Recall table It restores the values of the table previously saved into a file Print table TE It prints the contents of the table out to a printer connected to the CNC or as a file 8 Ls PRN format at the CNC E USER TABLES Appearance of the table mode FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 8 2 2 O O Operating manual Zero offset tables This table stores the zero offsets for each axis There are up to 20 absolute zero offsets and a special one for the PLC Although the table is common to all the channels when accessing from a channel it only shows the axes of that channel The offsets of other channels may be accessed from the vertical softkey menu ZERO OFFSETS origin xin vem A Zin Ac
210. n carried out by the service channel ID Processed Sercos ID Element Processed data Name Units min max Value Status Value Attributes Process Operation carried out Read Write Command status In processes with commands it indicates its status Error code Operation error code 0 OK 15 4 Save the CAN configuration for the start up test Saving a CAN configuration to a file serves to check the CAN configuration is correct when starting the system up The CAN configuration must only be saved to a file after having verified that it is correct Save the CAN configuration When the CAN bus level is selected it shows the SAVE softkey that may be used to save the current CAN configuration The configuration is saved in the file C Cnc8070 mtb data canData tab om a This file contains the number of groups present in the bus the number of modules the number of inputs and outputs etc Verify the CAN configuration during power up DIAGNOSIS Save the CAN configuration for the start up test To verify the configuration the information must be previously saved to the file canData tab During the power up process the data saved in the canData tabfile is compared with the data read during power up If when comparing the data they are not the same the corresponding error message is issued The CAN configuration is not the same as the one saved in the file Once the error is detected it will keep coming u
211. nce of the Manual JOG mode Tool calibration It accesses the tool calibration screens FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 66 4 2 Operations with the axes 4 2 1 Home search EBIC It is the operation used to synchronize the system This operation must be carried out when the CNC loses the position of the origin point e g by turning the machine off When searching home the axes move to the machine reference point and the CNC assumes the coordinate values assigned to that point by the machine manufacturer referred to machine zero When using distance coded reference marks or absolute feedback the axes will only move the distance necessary to verify their position The axes may be homed manually or automatically e Manual homing is done one axis at a time from the operator panel e Automatic homing is done with a subroutine defined by the machine manufacturer Manual home search It is done one axis at a time Home search of an axis is carried out as follows 1 Select the axis to be homed using the alphanumeric keyboard The CNC will highlight that axis to indicate that it is selected To select the numbered axes e g X1 select any axis and then move the selection until positioning on the desired one The focus moves with the keys 2 Press the homing key ZERO The CNC will display the 1 symbol in the numeric area indicating that a home search will take place 3 Press START to g
212. ne XY XZ YZ and to the 3D view Solid 3D Graphics It shows a 3D view of the part being simulated Starting out with a 3D block which is machined as the program is simulated Graphic window softkeys o gt EDITING SIMULATION MODE FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 117 EDITING SIMULATION MODE Graphic window softkeys FAGOR CNC 8070 SoFT V03 0x 118 6 5 2 Zoom To enlarge or reduce the whole graph shown or part of it This option is not available in the Combined type of graphics After selecting the zoom option a zoom frame will appear over the graphics This frame may be enlarged reduced and moved around over the graphics already displayed in order to select a particular portion of it to zoom into or out of Keys for selecting the zoom i To move the zoom frame around is To change the size of the zoom frame To validate and display the selected zoom area The graphics at the lower right hand side of the screen shows two figures The one shown with lines only indicates the dimensions of the display area and the one with colored sides indicates the portion selected with the zoom When selecting this option the softkey menu shows the available zoom options To return to the main menu press the key for the previous menu Zoom Initial Restores the size of the display are set via program or using the Dimensions option Zoom Automatic The CNC uses the zoom that i
213. nel CTRL S CTRL P CTRL R CTRL B START key STOP key RESET key Single block execution key Program editor Keyboard shortcuts available at the part program and PLC program editor CTRL TAB Toggle between the editor and the error window CTRL C CTRL X CTRL V CTRL Z CTRL G Copy the selected text onto the clipboard Cut the selected text Paste the selected text Undo the last change Save the program Recover the original program CTRL HOME Move the cursor to the beginning of the program CTRL END Move the program to the end of the program Keyboard shortcuts N C HOW TO OPERATE THE CNC FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 31 2 O O Operating manual Keyboard shortcuts HOW TO OPERATE THE CNC FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x AUTOMATIC MODE Automatic mode selection The automatic mode may be selected from any other operating mode by pressing its relevant key This work mode may be accessed from any channel and even from several channels at the same time A different program may be executed in each channel From the automatic mode and even while a program is in execution it is possible to access another work mode except the JOG mode and the MDI mode If program execution has been interrupted either because it is being executed in single block mode or because the STOP key has been pressed the CNC cancels the execution of
214. neral status bar This mode may be displayed with several screens The current screen and the total number of available screens are shown at the upper right hand side of the general status bar Switching between the different screens is done by pressing the editing simulation mode accessing key The screen selection is rotary in such a way that when pressing this key on the last screen it shows the first one of the operating mode Standard configuration The standard configuration of this work mode described in this manual corresponds to the one supplied by Fagor In some cases the manual shows a sample screen instead of that of the CNC in order to make it easier to understand These screens may be customized by the machine manufacturer changing its contents as well as its appearance They may also remove certain screens or add some of their own 6 1 1 General screen description On a typical screen for this work mode the information is laid out as follows EXAMPLE ah LINE 12 y aaa C A Windows of the editing simulation mode EDITING SIMULATION MODE Appearance of the editing simulation It shows the operating windows of the selected screen Every screen may consist of one or more windows See 6 1 2 Window description on page 94 B Status of the program selected in this work mode or channel number when using them In any case the background color will be different depending on the status of the pr
215. next to the list of axes it will also show the status that the spindle had before the inspection The axes and the spindle may be repositioned simultaneously Reposition the axes The axes may be repositioned one by one or all atthe same time To reposition them select the axes with the relevant softkey and press START The axes reposition at FAGOR the feedrate defined by the OEM The axes may be repositioned using the JOG keys or handwheels On the otherhand repositioning may be interrupted using the STOP key to select other axes Once CNC 8070 one axis has reached its position it will no longer be available Sort V03 0x 59 2 O O Operating manual Restore the spindle turning direction The spindle turning direction may be restored together with the axes or separately To do this it shows next to the axes to be repositioned the previous status of the spindle M3 M4 or M19 To restore the turning direction select the softkey and press START AUTOMATIC MODE Program selection and execution FAGOR CNC 8070 SoFT V03 0x 60 3 6 4 Block search and program execution With block search it is possible to recover the program history up to a particular block in such way that if program execution is resumed at that block it will do so with the same conditions as if it were executed from the beginning There are two types of block search e Automatic To recover the program history up to the block whe
216. nfiguration of plane type axes The longitudinal axis In this configuration the second axis of the channel is considered as longitudinal axis If the X first and Z second axes have been defined the work plane will be the ZX and Z will be the longitudinal axis Tool length compensation is applied on this longitudinal axis when using milling tools With lathe tools tool length compensation is applied on all the axes where a tool offset has been defined When using milling tools on a lathe the longitudinal compensation axis may be changed by means of the TOOL AX instruction or the G20 function 5 1 Manual calibration Calibration without a probe In this mode only the active tool can be calibrated and it may be a milling tool or a lathe tool The CNC will show the necessary data and will update the help graphics according to the selected tool Manual T calibration oT Rw 4 A A c Calibration A Machine data Position of the axes tool and active tool offset real spindle speed and real feedrate of the axes B Area to define the calibration data MANUAL JOG MODE TOOL CALIBRATION Manual calibration Calibration without a probe C Drawing indicating that tool calibration is allowed If the drawing is not displayed some of the data is missing Tool calibration Since there is no probe a reference part is required to calibrate the tool The calibration consists in moving the tool manually
217. nfigured by the machine manufacturer to access their specific operating modes PN e Machine parameters e PLC e Diagnosis mode Ej e Setup assistance FAGOR CNC 8070 SoFT V03 0x 16 Task window All CNC operating modes may be accessed from the task window Use the CTRL A keys to open the task window Press ESC to close the window without making a selection The task window looks like this SYSTEM SHORTCUT gt AUTOMATIC T MANUAL EDISIMU le USER TABLES C TOOL TABLES O UTILITIES Pr PLC EE MACHINE PARAMETERS lt DIAGNOSIS DDSSETUP TUNING gt A Available operating modes B Shows or hides virtual jog panel Same as using the CTRL J key combination C Expands the list of active CNC messages Same as using the CTRL O key combination D Expands the list of active PLC messages Same as using the CTRL M key combination Moving around in the task window Besides the mouse the following keys may be used To move the cursor thru the elements of the window B B Moves the cursor over the list of operating modes After selecting an operating mode or one of the lower buttons press ENTER to activate it Operating modes N E HOW TO OPERATE THE CNC FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 17 Operating modes HOW TO OPERATE THE CNC FAGOR CNC 8070 SoFT V03 0x 18 2 2 2 Description of the various operating modes Aut
218. nformation FOLDERS CACNC8070 USERS PRG PROGRAMS 007508 NC 207 BYTES 19 10 2000 11 12 42 Gp Aichives de programa G81 49 BYTES 10 10 2000 14 42 26 7 bin G82 1KB 18 05 2000 12 53 G83 276BYTES 27 09 2000 17 amp CNce070 G84 750BYTES 09 10 2000 10 z z z zl z z z H E FAGOR 21KB 18 01 2000 17 E MTE 158BYTES 06 11 2000 18 E TMP Enample NC 13KB 29 01 2001 083520 uninst MIRROR IMAGE NC 185 BYTES 18 10 2000 11 12 44 3 B M ROUNDPAR NC 1OOBYTES 20 09 2000 16 58 14 I E Pocket a Pro PROGRAMS Profile E Reports RECYCLED Gtest E tmp amp WINDOWS By Microsoft Network UTILITIES MODE Appearance of the utilities mode 11 FILE S 39 KB A Folder tree It may show the folders of the CNC of a floppy disk or another CNC or PC connected via Ethernet B List of files saved in the selected folder To switch windows press the relevant key Softkey menu When selecting the utilities mode the horizontal softkey menu will show the options related to this work mode FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 205 10 1 2 Window description Folder tree This window shows the folders that may be accessed from the CNC as well their structure Besides the CNC folders it may show those of a floppy disk or another CNC or PC connected via Ethernet The folders may contain files and other folders Description It contains no folders It cont
219. ng and tool inspection mode When interrupting the rigid tapping and accessing the tool inspection mode it is possible to jog the axes only in jog mode that are involved in threading When moving the axis the interpolated spindle will also move the spindle used to make the thread If rigid tapping involves several axes when moving one of them all the other ones involved in the thread will also move AUTOMATIC MODE Program selection and execution This allows moving the axis into or out of the thread as often as desired until pressing the repositioning softkey The axes move at the programmed F except when an axis or spindle exceeds its maximum feedrate allowed parameter MAXMANFEED in which case the feedrate will be limited to that value The spindle jogging keys are disabled during tool inspection It is only possible to get out of the thread by jogging one of the axes involved in rigid tapping Functions M3 M4 M5 and M9 cannot be programmed at the spindle they are ignored While repositioning when selecting one of the axes of the thread on the softkey menu it will move all the axes and spindle involved in the thread Reposition the axes and the spindle To end tool inspection and reposition the spindle and the axes at the point where tool Ae inspection began press the relevant icon After pressing this icon the CNC will show a list of the axes that are out of position If the spindle was stopped during tool inspection
220. ng on configuration there may be a general handwheel to move any axis or an individual handwheel per axis that will only move its associated axis m To move the axes with the handwheels turn the jog selector switch 8 of the operator Pa To N panel to one of the handwheel positions Every position indicates the multiplying a 1000 factor applied to the handwheel pulses the typical values are the following 10000 Om a Selector position Distance 1 0 100 mm or 0 0100 inches 10 1 000 mm or 0 1000 inches 100 10 000 mm or 1 0000 inches Once the desired resolution has been selected and depending on the type of handwheel being used general or individual proceed as follows y General handwheel The general handwheel is not associated with any axis in particular It may be used to move any axis of the machine if the manufacturer has set it that way Proceed as follows 1 Select the axis to be jogged On the JOG keyboard press one of the keys for the axis to be jogged If several axes are selected simultaneously they all move at the same time The CNC will highlight them indicating that they are selected When selecting an axis or quitting the handwheel mode using the movement selector the previous one is automatically deselected 2 Once the axis has been selected the CNC will move it as the handwheel is turned depending on the setting of the selector switch and on the turning direction of the handwheel The
221. ng the graphic sections With this option it is possible to select the axis whose indicator is to be moved The indicator may also be selected with the and keys of the numeric keyboard in a rotary fashion Xmin Xmax Ymin Ymax Zmin Zmax Zoom Edit Itis used to manually edit the zoom values It is edited in the dialog area of the graphic window that shows the dimensions of the zoom frame Keys for defining the zoom 0 Z To move the cursor through the data To validate and display the defined zoom area ESC To cancel the defined zoom 3 5 3 Dimensions Itis used to define the size of the graphic representation by setting the maximum and minimum coordinates of the graphics on each axis When selecting this option the softkey menu shows the options available for setting the dimensions To return to the main menu press the key for the previous menu Dimensions Automatic The CNC sets the dimensions that it considers best according to the movements programmed Dimensions Edit It is used to manually edit the dimension values It is edited in the graphic window that shows the dimensions of the graphics on each axis Keys for setting the dimensions 9 2 To move the cursor through the data To validate and display the set dimensions ESC To cancel the set dimensions AUTOMATIC MODE Graphic screen softkeys W FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 51 AUTOMATIC MODE Graphic
222. ng the graphics also shows the machine parameters that affect the movement reversal These parameters may be modified while running the test thus being possible to evaluate the response of the system to these changes and optimize the adjustment on the go Selection of setup assistance Setup assistance may be accessed either using the user key if it has been set accordingly or from the task window by selecting the Tuning option The task window may be accessed with key combination CTRL A The different tools are accessed from the horizontal softkey menu lo f The oscilloscope ER The Bode diagram C The circularity roundness test 13 1 Oscilloscope The oscilloscope is an assistance tool for adjusting the CNC and the drives This utility can graphically show 4 previously selected variables modify their values and check the different responses of the system Using the oscilloscope itis possible to edit the CNC s machine parameters that affect the adjustment it is also possible to modify at the Sercos drives the variables that have writing permission In any case a protection password is required for modifying the CNC s machine parameters or the drive s variables The oscilloscope is an assistance tool that only shows the response of the system to the various settings adjustments it is up to the technician to choose the best adjustment How to access the oscilloscope The oscilloscope may be accessed from the
223. nguage active at the CNC Pressing the Show softkey access the service screen To close the message window press ESC Description This screen shows the messages MSG and errors ERR defined at the PLC The screen shows the following table MESSAGES AND ERRORS j A yO B YLAYEE c PSAGE RE Dp FILE MSG 1 x MSG 2 CACNC8070 MTB PLC Langimsg2 bmp x MSG 3 CACNC8070 MTB PLC Langimsg3 jpg X MSG 4 CACNC8070 MTB PLC Langimsg4 bt x MSG 5 CACNC8070 MTB PLC Langimsg avi x MSG 6 CACNC8070 MTB PLC Langimsg6 bmp 1 MSG 11 x ERROR 6 x ERROR 7 X ERROR 8 X ERROR 9 x ERROR 10 w A Message or error identifier Number between 1 and 256 that identifies the message MSG or the error ERR The numbering needs not be sequential B Display of the additional information files It indicates whether to show or not the file for additional information when displaying the message When it comes to errors it cannot be edited C Text of the message or error displayed for the user D Address of the additional information file It may be a text file txt image file bmp jpg a combination of both htm html or a video avi When it comes to errors it cannot be edited because they cannot be assigned an information file 11 13 1 Options of the Messages service softkeys Save It saves the messa
224. nload a tool from the magazines through the spindle using a maneuver e Saving the table contents e Recalling the table contents e Printing the table contents e Initializing the tables FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 171 TOOL AND MAGAZINE TABLE Showing tables and common operations FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 172 9 1 Showing tables and common operations 9 1 1 Table selection This operating mode consists of several tables The various tables may be selected using the horizontal softkeys Softkey T Tool table This table defines the tools available and the data associated with each one of them This table is common to all the magazines Active tools table This table shows the tool that is active in each channel and the data associated with it Change process This table monitors the tool changes being executed in each channel Tool magazine table there is one table per magazine For each magazine it shows the tool distribution and the remaining life time of each tool if tool life monitoring is active If the magazine has a changer arm it shows the tool located in it The description of the magazine type can also be shown The icon associated with this table depends on the software configuration lathe or mill When selecting one of these tables it is displayed on the screen and the vertical icon menu shows the icons associated with that table Later sections
225. nterclockwise arc To edit a counterclockwise arc O New profile To edit a new profile O Modify the last one For modifying the last section of the profile Definition of a straight section To define a straight section the softkey menu shows the necessary options to define the data for the section To define the section s end point To define the angle of the straight section with the abscissa axis To define whether the section is tangent to the previous path To accept and draw the defined section The data is defined in the data area of the screen where the following information is shown Coordinates of the section s starting point They cannot be modified because they belong to the endpoint of the previous section Coordinates of the section s endpoint Angle of the straight section with the abscissa axis It indicates whether or not the section is tangent to the previous path SH Profile editor EDITING SIMULATION MODE FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 141 Definition of a curved section clockwise or counterclockwise To define a curved section the softkey menu shows the necessary options to define the data for the section XY To define the section s end point Center X To define the arc s center coordinate along the abscissa axis 6 Center Y To define the arc s center coordinate along the ordinate axis W 5 Radius To define the arc radius s o Tangency To define whether the section is tangent to t
226. o ahead with the home search or ESC to cancel the operation ee ee ee ee ee When searching home in this mode the CNC cancels the zero offset the fixture offset and the measuring offset Itassumes the machine reference zero point home as the new part zero Automatic home search This homing method is only available if the machine manufacturer has previously defined a homing subroutine Home search using a subroutine is carried out as follows 1 Press the homing key ZERO The CNC will display a dialog box requesting confirmation to execute the home search 2 Press START to go ahead with the home search or ESC to cancel the operation MANUAL JOG MODE Operations with the axes FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 67 MANUAL JOG MODE Operations with the axes FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 68 4 2 2 Jogging the axes Bin Z EY Ea The axes may be jog using the JOG keyboard on the operator panel Two types of movements may be made e Continuous jog when the axis moves while acting on the keyboard e Incremental jog when the axis moves a specific distance every time the operator acts on the keyboard The type of jog is selected with the jog selector switch on the operator panel M w JOG Continuous jog Incremental jog Handwheels JOG keys There are two types of jog keyboards depending on the behavior of the keys Type I There are two keys for eac
227. o select a program press the icon Select program of the softkey menu and the CNC will show a list of all the programs available See 2 5 File selection window on page 22 Once a program has been selected its name appears on the general status bar For each channel it shows the name of the program selected in that channel AUTOMATIC MODE Program selection and execution FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 57 AUTOMATIC MODE Program selection and execution FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 58 3 6 2 Program execution The name of the program selected in the channel for execution appears on the general status bar See 3 1 2 Description of the general status bar on page 36 If not indicated otherwise the program execution will begin from the first block of the program to the execution of one of the end of program functions M02 or M30 As an option it is possible to define the first and last blocks of the execution See 3 3 Data screen softkeys on page 41 Start executing To start the execution of the program press START on the Operator Panel The program may be executed in single block or automatic mode the mode may be selected even while executing the program When single block is active the screen will display the relevant symbol on the general status bar If the single block mode is active program execution will be interrupted at the end of each block the START key must be p
228. of the list To acces the service selected with the cursor b PLC Appearance of the PLC mode Softkey menu When selecting the PLC mode the horizontal softkey menu will show the options associated with the PLC service currently selected The set of options offered by this menu may be changed using the softkey which offers a new set of options FAGOR 8070 CNC Sort V03 0x 219 11 PLC Appearance of the PLC mode FAGOR 8070 CNC SoFT V03 0x 220 11 1 2 Icon description vertical softkeys The icon menu always shows all the icons associated with the active PLC service The icons are activated with their associated softkey F8 to F12 List of icons Show hide the service window It toggles between the shared usage of the area of the PLC environment that displays both the service window and the data window and the full work screen hiding the service window so the data window is expanded covering the whole area of the PLC environment Find text It is used for searching a text in all the files of the project The result will be shown at the Outputs service Go to file It only appears when working with the Outputs or Cross references service If the cursor is positioned on the result of a text search a compiling error or a PLC resource after selecting this option it opens the corresponding file and the cursor goes to the line it refers to 11 2 P
229. of the logic analyzer When selecting this option the CNC shows a dialog box with the options available for customizing Set aspect _ cm of NTN Control Edition Graphic oO Q a 2 gt Fixed Text fp Bi i g D Active Text a Active Text N text 5 E J background Inactive Text a Inactive Text EEI text 5 E background Late 2 fo z Wrong Data prr Wrong Data f text 16777213 background 255 A To move the cursor through the elements of the list BARGE To show the color palette To select a color from the palette ER Accep the selection in the color palette ESC It cancels the selection in the color palette After defining the new look use the cursor to select one of the buttons here below to accept or ignore the changes made and press ENTER Cancelar Aplicar Q A To accept the changes and close the dialog box B To ignore the changes and close the dialog box C To apply the changes and close the dialog box The dialog box may also be closed directly without accepting the changes by pressing ESC FAGOR 8070 CNC Sort V03 0x 239 h PLC Monitoring service FAGOR 8070 CNC Sort V03 0x 240 11 10 Monitoring service This service is used to analyze the status of the various PLC variables and resources When selecting the Monitoring option at the service window it will show a list w
230. of this chapter show amore detailed description of the icons and operations that may be carried out in each table Pressing the key for the previous menu deselects the active table When no table has been selected the vertical icon menu may be used to save and restore all the tables Simultaneous operations for all the tables If no table is currently selected the vertical softkey menu will show the following softkeys to save or load all the tables See 9 1 3 Save and load the tables on page 174 EE Sh Save the tables Saves the data of all the tables Recall the tables It restores the data previously saved for all the tables 9 1 2 Search for a text in the tables Itis possible to search for a text or a value in the list of tools and magazine positions The search is carried out from the vertical softkey menu This icon starts the search Once the icon has been pressed the CNC will display a dialog box to define the search criteria The defined criteria is maintained until a new one is defined This icon is shown when a search criteria has been defined it makes it 9 possible to search for the next match using the current search criteria a To start or resume the search press ENTER and the focus will position on the first match found Every time one of the icons is pressed it offers the option to search for the next match or to define a new search The search may be canceled by pressing the E
231. ogram When selecting this option the CNC requests the line number Key in the desired number and press ENTER the cursor will then go to that line 3 4 Graphic screen To display a graphic representation of the program that is running and take measurements on the graphics Description of the graphics window The graphic window shows the following information Se Ww c X 00030 000 O S O 2 Y 00050 000 9 O Z 00020 000 e 2 Q Mil Oo B 5 F 0 E A S 0 lt x if 3 D 1 z ky EE A Display area Shows a graphic representation of the tool paths or of the part as the program is being executed B Dialog area Shows the position of the axes and the machining conditions active in the execution feedrate spindle speed tool and tool offset When selecting specific options of the softkey menu it shows the information associated with that option which may be defined by the user C Information area Shows the work plane appearing in the display area and an illustration representing the size of the graph and the portion of the graphic area selected with the zoom On 3D graphics the illustration shows the point of view of the graph displayed and it may be changed by the operator Keys for selecting the point of view Select a new point of view BWE Assumes the new point of view selected ESC Cancels the selected point point of view FAGOR CNC 8070 D CNC messages
232. ogram being simulated Ready Background color White In simulation Background color Green Interrupted Background color Dark green In error Background color Red C Program name and location The background color will be different depending on the status of the program D CNC messages FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 93 EDITING SIMULATION MODE Appearance of the editing simulation 6 1 2 Window description As mentioned earlier each screen may consist of one or many of the following windows later sections of this chapter describe each one of them in greater detail e Edit window For editing new programs or modify the existing ones Editing is possible using a profile editor a conversational canned cycle editor or using the TEACH IN feature e Graphic window This window shows a graphic representation of the program during the simulation It also allows taking measurements on the graphics e Program window For selecting the starting and ending conditions of the simulation e Statistics window For estimating the machining time for each tool and the total program execution time When the screen consists of several windows the softkey menu will show the options of the active window To switch windows and access the desired softkey menu press the relevant key a FAGOR CNC 8070 SoFT V03 0x 94 6 1 3 Icon description vertical softkeys BE a The icons are act
233. ol number and the magazine position to insert it By default it offers the position selected on the list with the cursor 3 Press the CYCLE START key to load the tool automatically by means of the spindle or the ENTER key to update the positions list after loading manually TOOL AND MAGAZINE TABLE Operations with the magazine table O FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 199 TOOL AND MAGAZINE TABLE Operations with the magazine table FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 200 Magazine management using the positions list This type of management is only valid for loading tools manually It lets update the list of positions after having placed the tools directly in the magazine without using the CNC 1 Select a magazine position from the list and enter the number of the tool it occupies it 2 Press ENTER to update the positions list Unloading a tool The tool is unloaded into the magazine using the vertical softkey menu After unloading a tool from the magazine it becomes a ground tool Magazine management using the Unload tool softkey This type of managementis valid for unloading tools both automatically and manually After pressing the softkey the user is asked what kind of loading to do 1 Press the softkey associated with tool unloading 2 Enter the number of the tool to be unloaded 3 Press the CYCLE START key to unload the tool automatically to the spindle or the ENTER key to update the po
234. olors Keys for defining colors 9 2 To move the cursor through the data To open and close the color palettes To move the cursor through the colors of the palette ESC To cancel the selected colors FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 123 6 5 8 Options It is used to set the appearance and some functions of the graphic window These options may be used at any time even while simulating a program z When selecting this option the softkey menu shows the available options To return to the main menu press the key for the previous menu Option Activate Deactivate 6 It is used to activate or deactivate the graphic representation When the graphic representation is deactivated and activated the current graphic is erased but the display conditions are kept active type of graphics zoom graphic parameters and display area that were active before that mode was deactivated Option Simple Combined It is used to hide or show the dialog and data areas on the right hand side of the graphic window so the drawing occupies the whole graphic window Graphic window softkeys Option Hide Tool Show Tool EDITING SIMULATION MODE It is used to hide or show the tool while simulating in 3D solid graphics Option Print It is used to print the graphics in a printer connected to the CNC or as a file BMP format at the CNC When printing to a file it is saved in the folder C Cnc8070
235. omatic mode It is used to execute part programs in automatic or single block mode While executing a part program any other operating mode may also be accessed except MANUAL and MDI without interrupting the execution of the program This way a program may be edited while another one is running background editing The running program cannot be edited Manual jog mode It is used to control the machine movements manually using the keys of the operator panel perform a home search set the part zero etc Editing simulation mode It is used for editing and simulating part programs even while running another part program MDI mode It is used for editing and executing blocks in ISO code or in high level language User tables It is used for manipulating the CNC tables regarding part programs zero offsets fixtures and arithmetic parameters Tool and magazine table It is used to edit CNC tables regarding the tools and the tool magazine Utilities mode It is used to handle CNC part programs copy delete rename etc A password may also be set to access the various operating modes Likewise it offers the possibility to do a backup or a restore of the desired part of the disk PLC It is used to operate with the PLC edit a program monitor change the status of its variables etc Machine parameter table It is used for setting the machine parameters to adapt the CNC to the machine Tuning mode S
236. ommand generator on gt L3 It turns the command generator off FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 311 2 O O Operating manual h DDSSETUP f Command generator FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x DIAGNOSIS EJ This operating mode may be used to test the hardware and software of the PC that the CNC is based upon e System information e Information about the modules that make up the CNC software e Information about the elements connected to the CNC through the CAN bus and SERCOS The diagnosis is a testing and displaying tool it cannot be used to modify the displayed values Diagnosis mode selection The diagnosis mode may be accessed either using the user key customized for it or from the tasks window The task window may be accessed with key combination CTRL A FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 313 xl DIAGNOSIS O1 Appearance of the diagnosis mode FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 314 15 1 Appearance of the diagnosis mode When this operating mode is active it will be indicated at the top right side of the general status bar This operating mode may be displayed with several screens Each one corresponds to an element of the CNC configuration Standard configuration The standard configuration of this work mode described in this manual corresponds to the one supplied by Fagor In some cases the manual shows a sample screen instead of that of the CNC in order to make it
237. on functions MM gt INCHES It converts from millimeters to inches INCHES gt MM _ It converts from inches to millimeters ABS x Absolute value INT x Integer Extended functions SQRT x Square root SQRT 16 LN x Neperian log LN 100 LOG x Decimal log LOG 100 ex e function InvLn 3 10 x Decimal exponent InvLog 50 INTEGRAL x It calculates the N 100 A 1 B 5 Integral x 2 integral ZERO x Function zero N 100 E 1e 10 A 5 Zero x 2 INTEGRAL function It returns as result the integral defined by the function between the limits defined by the A and B variables The precision of the result depends on the N variable that indicates the number of intervals used to divide the function in order to calculate the integral If N is less than or equal to zero it will be ignored and the number of intervals will be 100 If N is greater than 500000 the intervals will be 500000 ZERO function It returns as result the value that makes the function to be zero Since there may be several values satisfying this condition the result will depend on the initial value of the exploration defined with the A variable The precision of the result depends on the N variable that indicates the number of iterations of the resolution algorithm If N is less than or equal to zero it will be ignored and the number of iterations will be 100 If N is greater than 500000 the intervals will be 500000 2 O O Operating manual The E
238. onfiguration It contains neither the graphics nor the values of the machine parameters When loading a configuration the parameters assume the value they have at the time The configuration saving option does not update the machine parameter table To do that use the VALIDATE Softkey Save the configuration Press the SAVE softkey to save the current configuration Select the folder and the file name and press ENTER If there is a configuration already saved with the same name it will ask whether it is to be replaced or not By default the configuration is saved in the folder C CNC8070 MTB DATA or in the last folder selected by the user Load the configuration Press the LOAD softkey to load a previously saved configuration Select the folder and the file name and press ENTER g o SETUP ASSISTANCE The circularity roundness test FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 295 13 3 8 Machine parameters that may be modified General machine parameters Paramotor ums Utate O Axis machine parameter eS eee ee E a a ae a E ce a a o ee ee a B a E E GOOFEED mm inch or degrees eee SETUP ASSISTANCE GO The circularity roundness test INPOSW mm or n Immediate em a senvoor meat FAGOR CNC 8070 SoFT V03 0x 296 DDSSETUP K This operating mode may be used to set up Sercos drives by editing their para
239. onitor shows the CNC s status and in general the information about the whole system e The keyboard is used to communicate with the CNC the operator may request information on commands or change the CNC status using new instructions e The operator panel is used to govern the various elements of the machine including the movement of the axes and the control of the spindle etc Modules Depending on the CNC model it may be connected in different ways For example it would be possible to connect devices such as e Floppy disk drive e CD ROM unit e Printer e PC compatible keyboard e Mouse with PS 2 connector e Devices with USB interface e Ethernet connection e Etc For further information see the hardware manual FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x GENERAL CONCEPTS CNC configuration Hardware FAGOR CNC 8070 SoFT V03 0x Network connection Ethernet The CNC may be connected to a computer network through specific connectors The CNC must be configured as any node of the network as if it were a regular PC The following actions are possible when having a CNC configured as a node within the computer network e Access from any PC to the part program directory of the CNC e Access from the CNC to any PC to execute simulate or edit programs The program to be executed needs not be in the local disk e Copy programs and tables from the CNC to a PC and vice versa e Edit modify delete rename
240. ons are undone one by one starting from the most recent one 11 4 4 Operations with blocks 1 1 It is used to copy cut and paste the information of a block or set of blocks and export L this information as an independent program This option is only available when there is a text selected in the program or on the clipboard To select a text in the program keep the SHIFT key pressed while moving the cursor PLC Program editing softkeys When selecting this option the softkey menu shows the available options To return to the main menu press the key for the previous menu Operations with blocks Copy It copies the selected text onto the clipboard Operations with blocks Cut Copies the selected text onto the clipboard and deletes it from the program Operations with blocks Paste Pastes the contents of the clipboard into the program Operations with blocks Copy to program Saves the selected texts as an independent program When selecting this option the CNC shows a list of the available programs To save the text as a program 1 Select the destination folder 2 Define the file name atthe bottom window To replace an existing file select it from the list 3 Press ENTER to save the program or ESC to cancel the selection and close the program listing FAGOR 8070 CNC SoFT V03 0x 226 11 4 5 Find Replace It is used for searching for a line or a text in a program It can also replac
241. option the softkey menu shows the available options To return to the main menu press the key for the previous menu Operations with blocks Copy It copies the selected text onto the clipboard Operations with blocks Cut Copies the selected text onto the clipboard and deletes it from the program Operations with blocks Paste Editing window softkeys Pastes the contents of the clipboard into the program EDITING SIMULATION MODE Operations with blocks Copy to program Saves the selected texts as an independent program When selecting this option the CNC shows a list of the available programs Keys for selecting a program To switch windows ae To close and open a folder submenu l T To move the cursor thru the elements of the window aE To import the selected program ESC To cancel the selection and close the program listing To save the text as a program 1 Select the destination folder 2 Write the program name in the bottom window To replace an existing program select it from the list 3 Press ENTER to save the program or ESC to cancel the selection and close the program listing FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 105 EDITING SIMULATION MODE Editing window softkeys FAGOR CNC 8070 SoFT V03 0x 106 6 3 5 Find replace It is used for searching for a line or a text in a program It can also replace a text with another text W
242. or reduce the whole graph shown or part of it O Dimensions To define the size of the graphic representation O Point of view To change the point of view of the graph and show it from another perspective O Measurement To measure the distance between two points O Clear screen It is used to clear the screen or delete the graphics displayed O Colors To set the appearance of the graphics on display O Options To set the appearance and some options of the graphic window O Speed To change the simulation speed Graphics window o gt C EDITING SIMULATION MODE FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 113 Graphics window EDITING SIMULATION MODE FAGOR CNC 8070 SoFT V03 0x 114 6 4 1 Program simulation The graphic window shows the program selected at the editing window and its name appears at the bottom center of the screen G1 G17 READ C FAGORCNC PRG EXAMPLE Program selected for simulation The program simulation procedure is the following 1 Choose the type of graphic representation its dimensions and the point of view This data may also be modified during the simulation of the program 2 Activate the desired simulation options using the icon menu 3 Press the START icon to start the simulation The simulation may be interrupted with the STOP icon or canceled with the RESET icon Ba START STOP RESET The simulation of the program starts at the fi
243. ordinates of each axis It also shows the status of the Autozoom option C Work plane It shows which are the axes that make up the work plane at the profile editor and the direction of each one of them The lower left corner of the graphics window is taken as the origin of the coordinate system D Data entry and display area Area used to enter and display the data of the elements that make up the profiles E It is used to enter the values of the corners or the ISO coded text to be added to the element Softkey menu The options that may be selected from the softkey menu make it possible to edit profiles modify edited profiles select the zoom the work plane undo the last change and end the editing session While editing or modifying the profile the softkey menu offers the option to undo the last operation Likewise it offers the option to save the profile at any time When accessing the profile editor the softkey menu shows the following options O Edit To select the type of profile to be edited Also too enlarge a profile importa profile saved in DXF format O Modify To modify insert or delete elements of a profile O Displayed area To modify the zoom of the graphics area O Plane To select the axes of the plane and their direction O End It ends the profile editing session Before exiting the profile editor it will offer the option to save or not the edited profile O Undo To undo the last operation m
244. otkey Access L Length length wear and edge length R Radius radius wear nose tip radius and nose tip radius wear A Penetration angle O Offsets on each axis Offset selection The geometry data is associated with the tool offset If the tool has been defined with several offsets it shows the number of the offset whose data is displayed and it also allows selecting the previous or next offset To change offsets place the focus on the buttons and press SPACE lt gt gt Offset number and selection of the previous or next offset In 2 this case it will display the data of the second tool offset Operation type and tool Regardless of the software installed it is possible to define both milling and lathe tools The tool is defined depending on the operation it can carry out If it is not the right tool for any of the proposed operations it must be assigned the operation Others Once the operation has been selected the screen will show the available tools It will show a help graphic with the selected tool type The data to define the geometry of the tool will be relevant to the selected tool It will only show the data that makes sense for the selected tool Operation Tool type Milling A Flat endmill B Toric endmill C Ball endmill D Disk endmill Reaming A Reamer Grooving cutoff A Square Drilling A Drill bit Boring A Quill Tool table O m TOOL AND MAGAZINE
245. ound will be displayed in the Outputs service window To close this window and return to the editor press ESC To return to the editor without closing the window press the screen switching key It is used to restore save import or print a file When selecting this option the softkey menu shows the available options To return to the main menu press the key for the previous menu File Restore original This option will only be available when the auto save option is active the section on 11 4 6 Customizing in this chapter It is used to recover the original file without the changes made since the last time it was opened When selecting this option the CNC requests confirmation of the command File Save This option will only be available when the manual save option is active the section on 11 4 6 Customizing in this chapter It is used for saving the file that is being edited File Save as Itis used to save the file that is being edited with a different name After saving the file one keeps editing the new file File Include program It is used to import the contents of a file saved at the CNC into the program that is being edited File Print It is used to print the file that is being edited out to a printer connected to the CNC b h PLC Program editing softkeys FAGOR 8070 CNC Sort V03 0x 225 11 4 3 Undo To undo the last modifications made The modificati
246. outine to set the last block in order to recover the program history and resume program execution from that point on with the same conditions as if it were executed from the beginning When recovering the program history the CNC reads it up to the indicated block activating the G and M functions it reads along the way Likewise it sets the feedrate and speed conditions in the program and calculates the position where the axes should be When selecting this option the softkey menu of the CNC shows the options available for selecting the stop condition To return to the main menu press the key for the previous menu Subroutine selection To select the stop condition in a global subroutine which has been called upon from the program When selecting this option the CNC shows a list of programs available for selecting the desired subroutine Keys for selecting a program To switch windows To move the cursor thru the elements of the window To open the selected subroutine ESC To cancel the selection and close the program listing To select a subroutine from the list 1 Select the folder containing the subroutine 2 Select the program containing the subroutine or write its name in the bottom window 3 Press ENTER to open the program or ESC to cancel the selection and close the program listing The program window will show the contents of the selected subroutine Stop block It sets as the
247. ow the axes IR that are out of position The axes may be repositioned individually or several at the same time in one of the following ways e Manually Jog the axes with the handwheels or with the JOG keys The movement is limited by the repositioning end point and the corresponding software limit e Automatically Select the axes with the relevant softkey and press START Repositioning may be interrupted using the STOP key to select other axes When an axis reaches the repositioning end point itis no longer available however this axis may be moved with the handwheel or the JOG keys under the same FAGOR conditions as before Once all the axes have been repositioned none of them may be moved CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 61 2 O O Operating manual AUTOMATIC MODE Program selection and execution FAGOR CNC 8070 SOFT V03 0x MANUAL JOG MODE Jog manual mode selection The manual JOG mode may be accessed from any other operating mode except when a program is in execution by pressing its relevant key In the same channel the jog mode cannot be accessed while a program is running or a block is being executed in MDI The jog mode may be accessed in the rest of the channels If the execution of the program has been interrupted the CNC will cancel the execution of the program and will go into jog mode A program is interrupted when the STOP has been pressed or is waiting in single block mode When a
248. p even after a reset There two ways to correct the error e Power up the CNC again with the original CAN configuration the one saved in the canData tab file e Save the new CAN configuration The CAN configuration must only be saved to a file after having verified that it is correct FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 321 15 5 Generate a report with the system information A report with all the information offered by the diagnosis mode may be obtained from any section of the diagnosis mode This information may be printed or saved to a file This produces a document with all the information about the FAGOR system installed on a machine such as the software version status of the remote modules installed drives and motors etc To print the information use the Print icon When pressing this icon the CNC will show a dialog box requesting the print destination for the document printer or file When printing to a file it is possible to select the name and location of the file ol DIAGNOSIS O1 Generate a report with the system information FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 322 O O O Operating manual FAGOR 2 CNC 8070 SOFT V03 0x O O O Operating manual FAGOR 2 CNC 8070 SoFT V03 0x
249. pending on the type of values they can assume they will be defined as follows e If the parameter may assume a value between specific limits enter the desired value If the value exceeds those limits the parameter will assume its default value e If the parameter contains a list of options press ENTER to display the drop list and select one of those options e If the parameter refers to a file press ENTER and the CNC will show the list of available files Data validation After editing or modifying the table data the new values must be validated so they are assumed by the CNC To validate the data press the VALIDATE icon To validate certain parameters restart the CNC These parameters will be identified with the following symbol next to their name ro Restarting the CNC required FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 263 Operations with tables MACHINE PARAMETERS N FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 264 12 3 2 Save and recall tables Saving a table It may be used to save the table data in ASCII format in a file Use the softkey menu to select the table whose data is to be saved If no table is selected all the data of all the tables will be saved After selecting the table whose data is to be saved press the SAVE icon and the CNC shows a list with the tables that are already saved Keys for selecting a data file E To switch windows k gt To close and open a folder submenu 1
250. ples will be taken before the Trigger and the remaining 90 after that instant The Trigger condition is evaluated after gathering the indicated of samples If the position is defined as 50 and the Trigger condition takes place after taking 10 of the samples it is ignored until capturing 50 of the samples Machine parameters to be set In this area of the data window it is possible to directly change the values of up to 20 machine parameters to be adjusted a Oscilloscope SETUP ASSISTANCE FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 271 SETUP ASSISTANCE GO Oscilloscope FAGOR CNC 8070 SoFT V03 0x 272 Softkey menu Horizontal softkey menu The horizontal softkey menu offers the following options O Softkey CONFIG It access the configuration screen It may be used to define which variables will be displayed their scale colors time base the Trigger the trigger condition the parameters to act upon etc O Softkey DATA It accesses the data processing submenu This submenu serves to save and load the captured trace as well as the configuration defined for it It may also be used to send data of the captured trace out to printer or to a file O Enlarge screen With this option it is possible to enlarge the graphics window to the left using the area that shows the variables to be displayed Pressing the same softkey returns the screen to the previous size O Softkey OVERLAP CHANNELS
251. press the key for the previous menu Customizing Appearance looks It is used for personalizing the look of the different elements of the editing window and the colors of the elements of the program When selecting this option the CNC shows the dialog box with two panels The first one has the elements of the editing window that may be customized and the second one those of the program The panel is selected by the key combination CTRL TAB Set aspect AN GENERAL OPTIONS SINTAX COLORING FONT EDITOR Courier New XB ERROR WINDOW TITLE TATUS BAR g SIZE TEACH IN E KO T Bob TEXT BACK gt o m Text _ To move the cursor through the elements of the list 2 To select an option of a group A seat To turn on off the checkboxes C and to open close the drop lists B After defining the new look use the cursor to select one of the buttons here below to accept or ignore the changes made and press ENTER Cancelar Aplicar A c A To accept the changes and close the dialog box B To ignore the changes and close the dialog box C To apply the changes and close the dialog box The dialog box may also be closed directly without accepting the changes by pressing ESC Customizing Auto Save Manual save It is used to save the program automatically or manually e When auto save is on the CNC will automatically save the program
252. printing After selecting the destination press ENTER to print it or ESC to cancel it AUTOMATIC MODE Graphic screen softkeys ioe FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 55 O O O Operating manual AUTOMATIC MODE Graphic screen softkeys Option Print setup It is used to set the printing configuration When selecting this option the CNC shows a dialog box where the following may be defined A The title of the graphics that will appear next to it in the print B The name of the file where the graphics will be stored when printing out to a file Print configuration Print Configuration x A TITLE EXAMPLE FILE CNCBO7O USERS Reports Graphies bmp Cancel To move the cursor through the elements of the list To accept the configuration defined To cancel the defined configuration After filling out the data press ENTER to accept them or ESC to cancel them 3 5 9 Real coordinates FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 56 It is used to draw the real tool path or the theoretical tool path This option is only available in line type graphics When selecting this option the softkey will appear pressed the CNC draws the actual real tool path 3 6 Program selection and execution 3 6 1 Program selection A different program may be selected and executed in each channel The program is executed in the channel where it is selected from T
253. ptions O Softkey SIMPLE It captures the data of a full circle O Softkey CONTINUOUS It captures data continuously O Softkey STOP It stops the data capture This softkey is shown when data capture is running This softkey only stops the data capture It does not stop the movement of the axes To stop the movement of the axes press the STOP key of the operator panel O Softkey CLEAR It deletes the graphic representation It may be done while the capture is running in that case it goes on with the graphic representation O Softkey LOAD It loads a previously saved configuration O Softkey SAV E It saves the configuration defined Vertical softkey menu The vertical softkey menu offers the following options T7 O Softkey VALIDATE It saves the values of the machine parameters in the tables of the CNC and or the drive accordingly When changing the values of the machine parameters the changes are effective immediately However these changes are maintained only during the current session of the CNC i e until the unit is turned off On power up it assumes the values stored in the tables O Softkey INITIALIZE y INITIALIZE It resets the window data to its default values 13 3 2 Configuring and executing the circularity roundness test The process consists in executing a circle with the axes of the machine and verifying it on its graphic representation The graphic
254. r arm It may be used to load and download a tool into the changer arm See 9 7 2 Load unload a tool to from the tool changer arm on page 201 Find text To search for a text on a tool list See 9 1 2 Search fora text in the tables on page 173 Loading a tool into the magazine The tool may be loaded into the magazine in two ways e Automatic loading pressing START A tool previously defined in the table is loaded into the magazine It is loaded from ground through the spindle e Manual loading pressing ENTER It assumes that the tool defined in the table has already been manually loaded into the magazine It updates the magazine list See 9 7 1 Loading unloading tools to from the magazine on page 199 Unloading the tool from the magazine The tool may be unloaded into the magazine in two ways e Automatic unload pressing START A tool defined in the table is unloaded from the magazine It is unloaded to ground through the spindle e Manual loading pressing ENTER It assumes that the tool defined in the table has already been manually loaded from the magazine It updates the magazine list See 9 7 1 Loading unloading tools to from the magazine on page 199 Initializing the table The table can only be initialized when the CNC is READY Initialize reset the magazine table The CNC will request confirmation of the command Initializing the tables eliminates all the tools from the list I
255. r window will show the following information e Location and name of the program being checked e Line number and position of the error within the block e Explanation of the error Moving the cursor through the errors of the window the editor will highlight the block containing the selected error Press ENTER to select the block containing the error or press ESC to close the error window Editing window GP EDITING SIMULATION MODE FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 101 6 3 Editing window softkeys 6 3 1 Open program To select a program for the editing simulation mode This program may be a new one or an existing one A different program may be edited and executed in each channel When selecting this option the CNC shows a list of the available programs See 6 2 5 File selection window on page 22 To select a program from the list 1 Select the folder that contains the program If itis a new program it will be saved in this folder 2 Select the program from the list or write its name in the bottom window To edit a new program write the name of the program in the bottom window 3 Press ENTER to accept the selection and open the program or ESC to cancel it and close the program listing EDITING SIMULATION MODE Editing window softkeys FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 102 6 3 2 File It is used to restore save import or print a program When selecting this option the so
256. ram e Line of the program where the cursor is B Information related to the position of the axes In the screen configuration supplied by Fagor the data displayed will be different on each screen Displaying the following information is the most typical e The programmed coordinate in other words the target position e The current position of the axes referred to part zero or machine reference zero home being this position referred to the tip of the tool or to its base e The following error axis lag C Active M functions o Active G functions and high level commands E Tool related information Number of the tool T that is currently selected currently active tool offset D associated with the tool and next tool Nextool to be loaded into the spindle F Information related to the spindle speed S Sreal Actual spindle speed Sprog Programmed speed S Percentage of speed override being applied on to the programmed value Depending on the active screen it will also show the spindle position SPOS and its following error SFWE a Data screen AUTOMATIC MODE FAGOR 2 CNC 8070 SOFT V03 0x 39 Data screen AUTOMATIC MODE FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 40 G Information related to the feedrate F of the axes Freal Actual feedrate of the axes Fprog Programmed feedrate F Percentage of feedrate override being applied on to the programmed value H
257. rameters selected and the rest of conditions colors trigger etc assume the values assigned by default a o Oscilloscope SETUP ASSISTANCE FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 279 SETUP ASSISTANCE GO The Bode diagram FAGOR CNC 8070 SoFT V03 0x 280 13 2 The Bode diagram The Bode diagram is an assistance tool for adjusting the CNC and the drives This utility may be used to obtain the Bode diagram of the response amplitude depending on the frequency of the input signal With this tool it is possible to insert a sinusoidal signal into an axis so that changing the frequency and analyzing the response provides the behavior of the axes at different frequencies and will give the user an idea of how it behaves with any signal This diagram may be used to check the system s gain the bandwidth and the mechanical resonance All this helps achieve the proper adjustment of the loops analyze mechanical problems and check the final features The Bode diagram is an assistance tool that only shows the response of the system to the various settings adjustments it is up to the technician to choose the best adjustment How to access the Bode diagram The Bode diagram may be accessed from the softkey menu for setup assistance Setup assistance Bode 13 2 1 O O O Operating manual Interface description ES The Bode screen looks like this with a single area for the graphics window that shows the Bode
258. raphics The various types of graphics may be line 3D lines XY XZ YZ and Combined or solid Sections and 3D solid Line graphics show the tool path with lines of different colors and solid graphics show an image of the part being simulated The type of graphics selected will remain active until another type is selected or the graphic display is deactivated or the CNC is turned off Likewise when changing the type of graphics the CNC will maintain the graphic conditions zoom graphic parameters display area etc defined for the last graphic When selecting this option the softkey menu shows the types of graphics available To return to the main menu press the key for the previous menu 3D lines Graphics It displays a three dimensional graph of the tool paths Sections Graphics It displays a top view XY plane of the part being simulated it shows the machining depths in different tones It also displays the XZ and YZ sections for the areas shown by the indicators of the top view These indicators may be moved around using the keys to display the different sections of the part The CNC shows dynamically the new section being selected The indicators may be moved at any time even while simulating the program XY XZ YZ graphics It displays the tool paths in the XY XZ or YZ plane Combined graphics It divides the display area in four quadrants and displays the tool path corresponding to each pla
259. rcle center coordinates e Circle radius e Programmed feedrate e Turning direction of the axes The turning direction is given by an icon To change the turning direction place the focus on the icon and press SPACE Execute the associated subroutine Press the START key to execute the subroutine The subroutine data cannot be modified while it is being executed The movement must be stopped before editing any of the data When trying to execute the subroutine if it is not in its pre established location the CNC interprets that it does not exist and it creates a predefined one Example of a subroutine The following example executes a repetitive circular movement in the XY plane In this case the repetitive movement is carried out in an endless loop using the GOTO command The movement is stopped with the STOP key of the operator panel Stestcirc_Vl Gl GS X0 YO F1000 KOE 2 O O O O SGOTO N10 M29 g o SETUP ASSISTANCE The circularity roundness test FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 291 13 Ww D O g as D Eg De a 5 a p Q 2 e W Yn 5 2 O o at H FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 292 13 3 5 Data capture for the graphic E Once the graphic representation has been defined and the machine axes are being interpolated the point capture for the graphics may begin The point capture is initiated from the softkey menu The point capture may be either simple where
260. rdingly Axis or spindle machine parameters that may be edited The table indicates the parameters that will be assumed at the beginning of the next block For this to be so the instruction SYNC POS must be programmed after each motion block CNC Drive Associated variable Update PRELOAD MPG PRELOAD tandem Immediate PRELFITI MPG PRELFITI tandem Immediate TPROGAIN MPG TPROGAIN tandem Immediate TINTIME MPG TINTIME tandem Immediate TCOMPLIM MPG TCOMPLIM tandem Immediate INPOSW MPA INPOSW set axis Immediate BACKLASH PP58 MPA BACKLASH set axis Immediate GOOFEED MPA GOOFEED set axis Beginning of next block MAXVOLT MPA MAXVOLT set axis Immediate PROGAIN PP104 MPA PROGAIN set axis Immediate FFGAIN PP216 MPA FFGAIN set axis Immediate MANFFGAIN PP216 MPA MANFFGAIN set axis Immediate ACFWFACTOR MPA ACFWFACTOR set axis Immediate ACFGAIN PP217 MPA ACFGAIN set axis Immediate MANACFGAIN PP217 MPA MANACFGAIN set axis Immediate LACC1 MPA LACC1 set axis Beginning of next block LACC2 MPA LACC2 set axis Beginning of next block LFEED MPA LFEED set axis Beginning of next block ACCEL PP42 MPA ACCEL set axis Beginning of next block DECEL PP42 MPA DECEL set axis Beginning of next block ACCJERK MPA ACCJERK _ set axis Beginning of next block DECJERK MPA DECJERK set axis Beginning of next block ESTDELAY MPA ESTDELAY set axis Immediate SERV
261. re V1 11 September 2002 Feature Probe management through a digital input It is not possible to manage it through the INST Counter module connector Set the numbering of the digital I O INST Kinetics for rotary table INST Possibility to park and unpark SERCOS axes from the PLC INST Keyboard simulation from the PLC INST New treatment of the JOG panel Key Direction INST OPT New machine parameters INST e Probe setting e Numbering of the digital I Os e Kinetics for rotary table e Repositioning feedrate after a tool inspection New variables e Probe setting e Numbering of the digital I Os e Key simulation e Repositioning feedrate after a tool inspection e General scaling factor e Kinetics dimensions General scaling factor SCALE Pobring canned cycles PROBE Probe selection SELECT PROBE Programming of warnings WARNING Block repetition SRPT Improved programming of high speed machining HSC Improved programming of axis swapping SET AX CALL AX FREE AX RENAME Macros The number of macros in a program is now limited to 50 Improved tool table Protection passwords Jog mode Tool calibration with or without probe Jog mode Automatic loading of zero offsets table FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x Feature Jog mode Programming of feedrate F and spindle speed S Axis selection deselection for handwheel
262. re the execution was canceled The CNC remembers the block where interruption was canceled thus not being necessary to set the stop block 2 e Manual To recover the program history up to a particular block set by the operator When recovering the program history the CNC reads it up to the indicated block activating the G and M functions it reads along the way Likewise it sets the feedrate and spindle speed conditions of the program and calculates the position where the axes should be AUTOMATIC MODE Program selection and execution To recover the program history proceed as follows 1 To do an automatic search i e restore the history up to the point where the program was interrupted press Automatic Search The search starting point may be chosen by selecting the first block 2 For a manual search set the last point using the stop block select the subroutine optional and the number of times optional The search starting point may be chosen by selecting the first block 3 Press START to recover the program history The CNC will set the feedrate and speed conditions of the program and will start the spindle in the set direction M3 or M4 It will also activate the M and G functions defined in the program 4 Reposition the axes to the position to resume execution 5 Press START to execute the program Reposition the axes To reposition the axes press the corresponding icon and the CNC will sh
263. real life greater than nominal life or it has been rejected If so it selects the next tool in the table that belongs to the same family The family or a tool may be any integer between 0 and 99999999 The 0 family is the same as not having a family i e the tools belonging to the 0 family cannot be replaced with another one Tool offsets Number of tool offsets Each tool offset has different geometry and monitory data associated with it A tool can have up to 8 offsets When a tool has several offsets their numbers must be correlative non skipping P Example of a milling tool with one offset left and two offsets right D1 Tool status It indicates the tool status The possible status are Worn out The real life is greater than the nominal life Rejected The tool has been rejected by the PLC When using tool life monitoring the worn out and rejected indicators are also set by the CNC when any of the previous cases occur Tool geometry This area shows the data about the tool type and its dimensions The geometry data depends on the type of tool The table only shows the data that makes sense for the selected tool While defining the data it shows various information graphics depending on the data being defined On the other hand the bottom of the screen shows the description of the data currently selected The data related to the geometry may be accessed with the following hotkeys H
264. ressed again to execute the next block If the automatic mode is active the program will be executed all the way to the end or up to the block selected as end of execution Interrupting the execution The STOP key interrupts the execution of the program Press START again to resume execution from where it was interrupted The execution may be interrupted at any time except when threading In that case it will be interrupted at the end of the threading operation Stop the execution The RESET key cancels the execution of the program and resets the CNC to its initial conditions Sees The program selected for execution may be executed in any operating mode by pressing START on the Operator Panel The CNC will request confirmation before starting to execute the program 3 6 3 Tool inspection This option is only available when the running program has been interrupted AL Activating tool inspection makes the following operations possible e Jogging the axes using the JOG keys of the operator panel or handwheels e Stop and start the spindle using the keys on the operator panel e Access the CNC tables tools tool offsets etc and modify their data 2 Once tool inspection is completed and before resuming the execution of the program the spindle must be started and the axes repositioned to the point where tool inspection began Once the axes are repositioned press START to resume program execution Rigid tappi
265. rograms service This service is used for managing the PLC project and its files The PLC project may consist of several files edited in any of the following languages e Equations or mnemonics extension PLC e C language extension C Lj PROGRAMS PLC project b ol in E Pia Files making up the PLC project UP da g o g st axis c a lt oO no w k B Selecting the PLC project it shows or hides the list of its files 5 S o PLC project The PLC project is a set of files that once compiled generate the PLC program When selecting the PLC project the softkey menu will show the options to manage that project Among these options it is possible to add files to the PLC project and compile it Files of the PLC project As mentioned earlier the PLC project may consist of one or several files edited in one of the following languages e Equations or mnemonics e C language One of the files of the PLC project may be edited in mnemonic languages extension PLC The rest must be edited in C language extension C When selecting a file the softkey menu shows the options to manage that file Among these options it is possible to edit and monitor the file These options will show the editing and monitoring screens FAGOR 8070 CNC Sort V03 0x 221 h PLC Programs service FAGOR 8070 CNC SoFT V03 0x 222 11 2 1 PLC project softkeys These option
266. ror management service al This service shows the list of errors detected by the drive The errors are shown in the order they come up Once the cause of the error has been corrected the errors may be reset with the ERROR RESET softkey of the horizontal menu GESTION DE ERRORES ERRORES JEJE W 0 warning s 0 error es detectados en el regulador gt l The command bar is located at the bottom of the window See 14 3 Command bar on page 302 Disabling the errors To disable an error of the drive use the ERROR LISTING softkey of the horizontal menu This softkey shows the whole list of possible errors To disable the desired ones checkmark the box on the left Then press the SEND softkey to send the list to the drive To make the error disabling effective execute the command DC1 reset errors from the command bar Disabling the errors requires an OEM or FAGOR access level See 14 4 Changing the drives accessing level on page 304 Even then only resettable errors may be disabled even if the list also shows the non resettable errors oma gt DDSSETUP service ror management Cr Crit FAGOR CNC 8070 SOFT V03 0x 307 DDSSETUP fa Monitoring service FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 308 14 7 Monitoring service ral This service monitors the value of the parameters and variables of the drive
267. rst block of the program and ends after executing one of the end of program functions M02 or M30 As an option it is possible to define the first and last blocks of the simulation See 6 6 Program window on page 126 Single block mode of simulation If the single block mode is active program execution will interrupted at the end of each block the START icon must be pressed again to continue The single block mode is selected from the icon menu and may be selected before or while simulating the program Simulation options The available simulation options are accessed from the icon menu Pressing the icon displays a window that shows the following options Tool radius compensation It activates or cancels tool radius compensation to simulate the program Tool radius compensation being off the simulation will ignore the programmed tool radius compensation M01 cH1 Conditional stop during simulation It simulates the external conditional stop switch While active the program simulation will be interrupted at the blocks having a conditional stop function M01 The simulation will resume when pressing the START icon Software limits It activates or deactivates the software limits for program simulation With the limits activated if the software limits are reached during simulation a simulation error message will be issued If not active the software limits will be ignored during simulation Block
268. s e The CNC only lets entering the data being shown thus avoiding any data entry errors when defining the cycles e The programmer is assisted at all times with help messages When done editing the cycle the CNC generates the necessary blocks and it will add them to the program inserting them after the block indicated by the cursor Profile editor To edit new profiles quickly and easily The editor shows a graphic representation of the profile being defined After defining the profile data the CNC generates the necessary blocks and it will add them to the program inserting them after the block indicated by the cursor TEACH IN It is basically the same as editing in CNC language except when it comes to programming coordinates This option displays the coordinates of each axis and lets enter them directly into the block indicated by the cursor Editing window O EDITING SIMULATION MODE FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 99 Editing window EDITING SIMULATION MODE FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 100 6 2 2 Import DXF files DXF files may be imported from the editor to the program being edited See 6 3 2 File on page 103 The DXF format is standard for exchanging graphic files Importing this type of files makes it possible to generate the part program directly from a drawing The DXF file may consist of points lines and arcs It can also consist of polylines but they must be previously uncom
269. s are used to create a PLC project and compile it to create the executable PLC program PLC project Add file It is used to add a file to the PLC project This file may be a new one or an existing one When selecting this option the CNC shows a list of the available files Keys for selecting a service k To switch windows it m To move the cursor through the elements of the list rom To add the selected file To cancel the selection and close the program listing To add a file to the PLC project 1 Select the file from the list or write its name in the bottom window 2 Press ENTER to accept the selection and add the file or ESC to cancel the selection and close the file listing When accepting the selection the selected file will appear on the list that make up the PLC project PLC project Generate PLC It compiles and loads the PLC program based on the files that make up the PLC project If an error occurs during compilation the program will not be generated and the CNC will display a list of the detected errors 11 2 2 Files of the PLC project PLC Softkey When selecting a program of the PLC project at the service window the softkey menu will offers the following options Files of the PLC project Edit It is used to edit the selected PLC file Selecting this option access the editing window section on 11 3 Program editing in this chapter b 1 Files of the PLC projec
270. s folder does not exist it creates it and goes on with the operation If the files being restored already exist they will be overwritten i e the ones in the folder will be replaced by the ones in the backup The name of the file from which the backup is restored is defined in the backup ini file If this file does not exist it proceeds as follows 1 It looks for the mtb r file in unit A and it restores it 2 If this file does not exist it restores the first backup file extension r of unit A 3 If there is no backup file it shows the relevant error message FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 215 O O O Operating manual 10 T EA g n w 2 Eg J E Z D2 D FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x PLC S In this operating mode the PLC may be accessed to check its operation or the status of the different PLC variables It is also possible to edit and analyze the PLC program as well as the message and error files of the PLC MDI mode selection The PLC mode may be accessed either using the user key customized for it or from the tasks window The task window may be accessed with key combination CTRL A What can you do in this work mode In short the PLC mode offers the following operations Edit modify or view the contents of the PLC project Debug the PLC program by executing the different parts of the program separately first cycle main module periodic module Analyze t
271. s means that when calculating the offset of a milling tool on an axis that includes the radius dimension that radius is included in the offset The same is true for the tool length When calibrating the offsets of a milling tool the length value is deleted but not the radius value A MANUAL JOG MODE TOOL CALIBRATION Manual calibration Calibration without a probe FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 83 5 2 Semi automatic calibration Calibration with a probe This option is only available when using a tabletop probe installed on the machine In this mode only milling tools can be calibrated T calibration with a probe PRBMOVE To measure Place T at probing starting point Select axis and probing direction Press START A Machine data Position of the axes tool and active tool offset real spindle speed and real feedrate of the axes B Area to define the calibration data It may be used to calibrate the length or the radius of the tool that is currently in the spindle After the calibration the wear is reset to zero MANUAL JOG MODE TOOL CALIBRATION Semi automatic calibration Calibration with a probe When changing the tool data the tool table data is updated after calibration Tool calibration The calibration consists in manually approaching the tool to the probe and then command the CNC to execute the probing movement The CNC will move the tool on the selected axis until
272. s showing the available configurations It is also possible to rename the new configuration O Softkey LOAD Press the load softkey to load a previously saved configuration Then a new screen appears showing a list of previously saved configurations being possible to select any of them 13 3 The circularity roundness test This tool helps improve and adjust the axis reversal peak an effect that appears when the axes reverse their moving direction With this utility a circle may be executed with the axes and graphically show the result This graphic shows the difference between the actual real coordinate obtained from the feedback device and the theoretical coordinate calculated at each point This difference is shown projected radially The same screen showing the graphics also shows the machine parameters that affect the movement reversal These parameters may be modified while running the test thus being possible to evaluate the response of the system to these changes and optimize the adjustment on the go g 3 The circularity roundness test diagram is an assistance tool that only shows the response of the system to the various settings adjustments it is up to the technician to choose the best adjustment How to access the circularity roundness test SETUP ASSISTANCE The circularity roundness test The circularity roundness test may be accessed from the softkey menu for setup assistance Setup assistance
273. s the list of the available tools and the right panel shows the data of the active tool in each channel Tool listing For each tool it indicates the position and the magazine where it is located whether itis a ground tool or the tool is active in a channel The CNC updates data of the list every time a tool change is carried out Itis the same list that appears in the tool table See 9 2 2 The tool list on page 180 Active tools It shows the data of the active tool in each channel and also the data of the tool selected on the list It is also possible to change the tool of the spindle See 9 4 1 Changing the tool of the spindle on page 191 FAGOR The tool data cannot be edited on this screen The data shown here is defined in the tool table CNC 8070 SoFT V03 0x 9 4 1 Changing the tool of the spindle It is possible to change the tool of the spindles from the active tools panel The tool to be placed must be defined in the tool table To change the active tool follow these steps 1 Use the cursor to select the active tool to be modified and enter the number of the new tool 2 Press the CYCLE START key to load the tool automatically or the ENTER key to update the positions list after a manual tool change 3 The tool list will show that the tool is in the spindle Active tools table TOOL AND MAGAZINE TABLE FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 191 O O O Operating manual 9 5 Table for the
274. screen softkeys FAGOR CNC 8070 SoFT V03 0x 52 3 5 4 Point of view It is used to select the point of view on 3D graphics The orientation of the graphics may be directly selected at the graphic window by orienting the XY plane and the Z axis The XY plane may be rotated 360 and the Z axis 90 The figure at the lower right hand side of the screen shows the point of view currently selected Keys for selecting the point of view To orient the XY plane v it k B To orient the Z axis EN ue To validate and display the selected point of view ESC To cancel the selected point point of view When selecting this option the softkey menu shows the options available for selecting the point of view To return to the main menu press the key for the previous menu Point of view Edit It is used to manually edit the orientation of the axes of the graphics It is edited in the dialog area of the graphic window that shows the current orientation of the axes Keys for defining the point of view T Z To move the cursor through the data To validate and display the defined point of view ESC To cancel the defined point of view 3 5 5 Measurement To measure the distance between two points This option is only available for the types of graphics XY XZ YZ and Solid 3D When selecting this option the section being measured will appear on the graphics with two cursors and a das
275. sitions list after unloading manually Magazine management using the positions list This type of management is only valid for unloading tools manually It lets update the list of positions after having removed the tools directly from the magazine without using the CNC 1 Select a magazine position from the list and delete the number of the tool it occupies it 2 Press ENTER to update the positions list 9 7 2 Load unload a tool to from the tool changer arm A tool is loaded unloaded to from the claws holders of the changer arm using the vertical softkey menu To insert a tool in the holders of the changer arm when available it must be placed in the magazine Ground tools cannot be placed in the claws holders of the tool changer arm Nor can the tools that are in the holders of the tool changer arm be inserted in the spindle To load or unload one of these tools 1 Press the softkey associated with the operations with the changer arm 2 Define the tool number in the positions of the tool changer arm When using a two holder changer arm there may not be tools in the spindle and in the second holder of the changer arm at the same time 3 Press ENTER to update the table TOOL AND MAGAZINE TABLE Operations with the magazine table FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 201 2 O O Operating manual jqe eulzebew y y m suoneiado JIgVL ANIZVOVIN GNV 1OOL CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x UT
276. softkey menu for setup assistance Setup assistance Oscilloscope function This utility is one of the features of setup assistance Together with the circularity test and the bode diagram it helps speed up and simplify the machine setup process _ EEE eee The oscilloscope function requires Sercos communication and a drive version V06 01 or later Otherwise the CNC will show the error Access denied a o Oscilloscope SETUP ASSISTANCE FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 269 O O O Operating manual SETUP ASSISTANCE GO Oscilloscope FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 13 1 1 Interface description v The screen of the oscilloscope function looks like this with two clearly different parts The left side and the lower side show the data of the variables to be shown the trigger data the time base and the parameters that may be acted upon The top right side shows the variables graphically The graphics window It is the area showing a graphic representation of the selected variables For each variable it shows the scale used to draw it The data area It is the area where the user interacts with the system It allows defining the graphic environment the variables to be display the trigger configuration the time base configuration and the values of the parameters involved Some of this data may also be defined at the configuration screen See Configura
277. sor position Find text FIND TEXT TEXT START BEGINNING C CURSOR To move the cursor through the elements of the list It selects an option from a group ENTER To start the search ESC To cancel the search and close the dialog box To start the search press ENTER and the cursor will position on the text found Pressing this FIND icon again will allow repeating the search or defining a new one MACHINE PARAMETERS Operations with tables FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 265 2 O O Operating manual Operations with tables MACHINE PARAMETERS N FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x SETUP ASSISTANCE The set of utilities of the setup assistance is meant to speed up and simplify the machine setup procedure The setup assistance offers the following utilities e The oscilloscope e The circularity roundness test e The bode diagram It must be borne in mind that these utilities are assistance tools that only show the system s response to the various adjustments it is always up to the technician to choose the best adjustment The oscilloscope The oscilloscope is an assistance tool for adjusting the CNC and the drives This utility can graphically show 4 previously selected variables modify their values and check the different responses of the system Using the oscilloscope itis possible to edit the CNC s machine parameters that affect the adjustmen
278. status of the tool change process This screen monitors the tool changes being executed in each channel CHANNEL 1 h MAGAZINE GROUND lt gt SPINDLE 9 EXECUTION STATUS A m CHANNEL 2 h MAGAZINE GROUND lt gt SPINDLE EXECUTION STATUS It indicates the following for each tool change process TOOL AND MAGAZINE TABLE Table for the status of the tool change process e The type of change selected and the magazine involved The type of change refers to the type of operation being carried out orto be carried out when executing function MO6 The possible types of change are load a tool into the spindle or load and unload a ground tool from the magazine through the spindle e The execution LED informs that the tool change process is running and that the magazine is carrying out an operation e The status LED informs on whether the magazine is in an error state or not To eliminate the error condition press the reset softkey in the magazine table FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 192 9 6 2 O O Operating manual Magazine table Up to four different magazines may be configured Each magazine has a table showing the tool distribution in the magazine and which table is in the spindle and on each holder of the changer arm if any The CNC updates the table data every time a tool is changed MAGAZINE POSITIONS INFORMATION m TOOL CHANGER ARM E D TOO
279. sted when trying to carry out the following actions in the machine parameter table e Modifying the value of a parameter e Initialize a table e Loading a table FAGOR CNC 8070 Customizing It is requested when entering the FGUIM application When entering the wrong password it will not be possible to access the application Sort V03 0x 213 10 Ee T x lt ae n w 2 E S as Es 2 D FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 214 Machine parameters for kinetics It is requested when trying to carry out the following actions in the machine parameter tables for the kinematics If not set it will apply the password used in the rest of the machine parameters e Modifying the value of a parameter e Initialize a table e Loading a table v How to set the protection passwords Press the Passwords softkey to access the password setting screen From this screen it is possible to define modify or delete the passwords If this screen is protected pressing the softkey will request the general password Each password may be up to 10 ASCII characters long It is case sensitive Keys to set the password To select the previous or next password It assumes the defined password ESC To cancel the defined password SUP It deletes the selected password The Delete all softkey deletes all the passwords defined 10 2 8 Data safety backup Backup Restore This option may be used to
280. synchronous The tool variables will be read asynchronously when the tool is neither the active one nor in the magazine The tool variables will be written asynchronously whether the tool is the active one or not The variables referred to local arithmetic parameters of the active levels will be read and written asynchronously INST PRG Spindle parking and unparking INST The RESETIN mark is not necessary to park unpark axes or spindles from the PLC INST Sercos control in velocity INST Behavior of the beginning and end of tool radius compensation when not programming a movement PRG Changing the type of radius compensation while machining PRG Via program loading a tool in a specific magazine position PRG Programming of modal subroutines MCALL PRG Executing a block in a channel EXBLK PRG Programming the number of repetitions in the block NR PRG Direct resolution of 2D and 3D pockets without requiring a softkey PRG Simulating a canned cycle of the editor separately PRG New method to jog the axes using the JOG keyboard Axis keys and independent directions INST OPT Importing DXF files from the program editor or from the profile editor OPT Importing programs of the 8055 8055i CNC from the program editor OPT Use a softkey to select the repositioning of the spindle after tool inspection OPT Backup restore u
281. t Monitoring O Q ak 2 It is used to monitor the selected PLC file wn Selecting this option access the monitoring window section on 11 5 Program 2 monitoring in this chapter S Q Files of the PLC project Eliminate It deletes the selected file of the PLC project the file will still be available in the CNC s hard disk Files of the PLC project Rename It is used to change the name of the selected file Files of the PLC project Copy It is used to make a copy of the selected file When selecting this option the CNC shows alist with the programs stored at the CNC Keys for selecting a service To switch windows k To close and open a folder submenu To move the cursor thru the elements of the window To save the new program ESC To cancel the selection and close the programs listing To make a copy of the file 1 Select the destination folder for the copy 2 Define the file name atthe bottom window To replace an existing file select it from the list 3 Press ENTER to copy the file or ESC to cancel the selection and close the file listing FAGOR 8070 CNC Sort V03 0x 223 11 3 Program editing To edit a program select it at the service window and select the Edit option of the softkey menu The CNC will access the program editor and will show the contents of the selected program To close the edit window press ESC 1 1 z Editor
282. t it is also possible to modify at the Sercos drives the variables that have writing permission In any case a protection password is required for modifying the CNC s machine parameters or the drive s variables The Bode diagram The Bode diagram is an assistance tool for adjusting the CNC and the drives This utility may be used to obtain the Bode diagram of the response amplitude depending on the frequency of the input signal With this tool it is possible to insert a sinusoidal signal into an axis so that changing the frequency and analyzing the response provides the behavior of the axes at different frequencies and will give the user an idea of how it behaves with any signal This diagram may be used to check the system s gain the bandwidth and the mechanical resonance All this helps achieve the proper adjustment of the loops analyze mechanical problems and check the final features FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 267 SETUP ASSISTANCE GO FAGOR CNC 8070 SoFT V03 0x 268 S The circularity roundness test This tool helps improve and adjust the axis reversal peak an effect that appears when the axes reverse their moving direction With this utility a circle may be executed with the axes and graphically show the result This graphic shows the difference between the actual real coordinate obtained from the feedback device and the theoretical coordinate calculated at each point The same screen showi
283. t also initializes the active tools table because the tool arrangement in the magazine may have changed Save table It saves the table data in a file See 9 1 3 Save and load the tables on page 174 Recall table It recalls the table data previously saved in a file See 9 1 3 Save and load the tables on page 174 Bear in mind that loading the magazine tool initializes the active tools table Print table 22 It prints the contents of the table out to a printer connected to the CNC or as a file 9 PRN format at the CNC See 9 1 4 Printing the tables on page 176 E Enabling and disabling a magazine position It enables or disables the magazine position selected with the cursor Magazine table Resetting the magazine ere It eliminates the error status of the tool manager This icon is only available when _ an error occurs at the tool manager TOOL AND MAGAZINE TABLE Magazine information It shows or hides the magazine data E FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 195 Magazine table TOOL AND MAGAZINE TABLE FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 196 9 6 2 List of magazine positions The list of magazine positions appears on the left panel of the tool magazine table For each position it indicates whether it is free disabled or has a tool For each tool it shows the remaining life time when using tool life monitoring and the family it belongs to Magazine position
284. t block is not defined the block search starts at the first block of the program The last block may be selected using the cursor or the Find text or Go to line options of the softkey menu Keys to move the cursor it g Moves the cursor line by line To move the cursor page by page e ore Moves the cursor to the first block or to the end of the program Data screen softkeys ioe AUTOMATIC MODE FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 45 AUTOMATIC MODE Data screen softkeys FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 46 3 3 4 Find text To find text or a character string throughout the program When selecting this option the CNC shows a dialog box requesting the text to be found It is also possible to select whether the search must start at the beginning of the program or at cursor position Find text TEXT START BEGINNING C CURSOR _ To move the cursor through the elements of the list It selects an option from a group To start the search ESC To cancel the search and close the dialog box To start the search press ENTER and the cursor will position on the text found By pressing ENTER again the CNC will look for the next match and so on To end the search press ESC The cursor will position on the block containing the text searched 3 3 5 Go to line To position the cursor on a particular line of the pr
285. t considers best according to the movements programmed Zoom Previous It displays up to two zooms defined earlier After the second one it shows again the one defined last Zoom Limits Only forthe Sections type In this graphics zooming is done by moving the indicators that appear framing the graphic sections With this option it is possible to select the axis whose indicator is to be moved The indicator may also be selected with the and keys of the numeric keyboard in a rotary fashion Xmin Xmax Ymin Ymax Zmin Zmax Zoom Edit Itis used to manually edit the zoom values It is edited in the dialog area of the graphic window that shows the dimensions of the zoom frame Keys for defining the zoom 9 2 To move the cursor through the data To validate and display the defined zoom area ESC To cancel the defined zoom Graphic window softkeys EDITING SIMULATION MODE FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 119 EDITING SIMULATION MODE Graphic window softkeys FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 120 6 5 3 Dimensions It is used to define the size of the graphic representation by setting the maximum and minimum coordinates of the graphics on each axis When selecting this option the softkey menu shows the options available for setting the dimensions To return to the main menu press the key for the previous menu Dimensions Automatic The CNC sets the dimensions
286. t from the list starting with that letter or number Pressing it again will select the second one and so on Programs may also be selected using the File search option of the softkey menu File Print It is used to print the program that is being edited out to a printer connected to the CNC File Import It permits importing DXF PIM and PIT files into the program being edited See 6 2 2 Import DXF files on page 100 e The DXF format is standard for exchanging graphic files Importing this type of files makes it possible to generate the part program directly from a drawing The files must consist of points lines and arcs e PIM and PIT files are part programs used by the 8055 CNC When importing this type of file its programming language is adapted to the one used by the CNC When selecting this option the CNC shows a list of the programs that may be imported into the one being edited Select the desired program from the list and press ENTER To undo the last modifications made The modifications are undone one by one starting from the most recent one 6 3 4 Operations with blocks Itis used to copy cut and paste the information of a block or set of blocks and export this information as an independent program This option is only available when there is a text selected in the program or on the clipboard To select a text in the program keep the SHIFT key pressed while moving the cursor When selecting this
287. t the calibration The CNC calibrates the tool making all the necessary movements there is no need to manually approach the tool If necessary the CNC makes the tool change 4 After the calibration It updates the tool table data EDITING SIMULATION MODE Selecting the editing and simulation mode The editing simulation mode may be accessed from any other operating mode even while a program is in execution by pressing the relevant key This work mode may be accessed from any channel and even from several channels at the same time A different program may be edited and simulated in each channel What can you do in this work mode The following operations are possible in this work mode e Edit modify or view the contents of a part program A program may be edited in CNC programming language ISO or high level with the assistance of a conversational editor for machining cycles and positioning assisted by a profile editor or using the TEACH IN feature e Simulate the execution of a program displaying a graphic representation of the program being simulated e Estimate the total program execution time and the machining time for each tool FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 91 EDITING SIMULATION MODE Appearance of the editing simulation FAGOR CNC 8070 SoFT V03 0x 92 6 1 Appearance of the editing simulation When this operating mode is active it will be indicated at the top right side of the ge
288. ta 00000 000 00000 000 00000 000 00000 000 00000 000 00000 000 o0000 000 00000 000 00000 000 00000 000 00000 000 00000 000 00000 000 00000 000 a c0000 000 00000 000 00000 000 00000 000 00000 000 00000 000 00000 000 oooo cc0 cg0000 000 00000 000 ooo00 000 00000 000 00000 000 00000 000 oo000 000 jji 00000 000 j 00000 000 Ey 00000 000 i 00000 000 00000 000 00000 000 00000 000 00000 000 iY 000 00000 000 00000 000 00000 000 00000 000 00000 000 r 00000 000 00000 000 00000 000 a 00000 000 00000 000 00000 000 00000 000 00000 000 A Machine axes and display units millimeters inches or degrees B Zero offsets C Zero offset value in each axes of the channel The end of this chapter describes how to edit this table PLC offset It cannot be directly defined in the table The values are set from the PLC or from the part program using high level variables It is used for example to correct deviations originated by machine dilatations The CNC always adds the PLC offset to the selected zero offset Absolute zero offsets Besides setting the values directly in the table they may also be set from the PLC or via part program using high level variables The zero offsets are used to place the part zero at different positions of the machine When applying a zero offset the CNC assumes as the new part zero the point set by the selected zero offset referred to the cl
289. tand O O O Operation manual 11 1 1 Screen description The PLC mode screen shows the following information EDITOR PLCPRG PLC ttt CYL OPTIONS k pleprg ple ra COMMANDS SERVOION SERVOZON SERVO3ON SERVO4ON SERVOSON fw OUTPUT DRENAX DRENAY DRENAZ DRENA4 DRENAS DRENA6 E LOGIC ANALYZER Des pea SPENAZ SPENA3 SPENA4 SPENAS SPENAG6 amp _ MONITORING MOV 0 R101 IE CROSS REFERENCES CNCWR R101 PLC TIMER M11 STATISTICS i MESSAGES END PRG START CYSTART 7Cambio de gama del cabezal PRRRAAAARRARARA ARERR AREER TT DN41 GEARI DM42 GEAR2 DM43 GEAR3 DMN44 GEAR4 nono v cap ove Num LINE 1 COLUMN 2 Service window It shows a list of the services available in the PLC environment Data window It shows the screen associated with the selected service if any The screens of the different services overlap each other If several services active it is possible to switch from one to another using the change key if it has been set accordingly To close a screen press ESC It shows the PLC status running or stopped CNC messages To switch windows press the relevant key Keys for selecting a service lt To close and open the file list of a service 4 i To move the cursor thru the services of the window To move the cursor to the beginning or end
290. ter DATA and it has the following structure M FUNCTION LE M VALUES SYNCHTYPE MTIME MPROGNAME Before Before Before Before Before Before __Before Before Before i J Before Before Befgao Before c aD A im ee Before Before WU 0 90 0000 o Before Before Before Before l Before Befor l Before Before HBHH Before Before Before Before RJ MACHINE PARAMETERS Parameter table description A Name of the selected machine parameter table B Order number C List of user defined M functions D Type of synchronism E Time for execution time estimate F Associated subroutine G Parameter description The section on 12 3 1 Data editing and validation in this chapter shows how to edit the parameters of the tables To obtain further information about the data appearing in the table refer to the chapter on machine parameters of the Installation and Start up Manual FAGOR CNC 8070 SOFT V03 0x O O O Operating manual 12 2 2 Compensation table There are two types of compensation table e Leadscrew error compensation which is accessed with the axis machine parameter COMPENSATION e Cross compensation which is accessed with the general machine parameter CROSS COMP These compensation tables have the following structure 1 2 C GENERAL PARAMETERS ss COMPENSATION 1 VALUES a S 12 2409 0 5849 0 3541 ws 15 7370 0 4511 0 5240 e 5
291. terclockwise 7 Center X 125 Radius 5 Tangency Yes arc The CNC shows the options for section 7 Select the correct one Straight 8 X 120 Y 20 Tangency Yes FAGOR The CNC shows the options for section 8 Select the correct one Straight X 100 Y 20 CNC 8070 Rounding definition A and B Select the CORNERS option and define Rounding Select point A Assign radius 5 Press ENTER Rounding Select point B Assign radius 5 Press ENTER Sort V03 0x Press ESC to quit the CORNER option End of editing Select the END option and save the profile The CNC quits the profile editor and inserts the profile in the part program 149 o0 00 Profile editor EDITING SIMULATION MODE FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 150 Starting point Clockwise arc Straight Counterclockwise arc Straight Clockwise arc Counterclockwise arc Straight Clockwise arc Counterclockwise arc Straight Counterclockwise arc Clockwise arc Straight Profile definition X 60 Center X 60 1 Angle 60 2 Radius 15 3 Angle 70 Center X 40 4 Radius 15 Y 130 The CNC shows the options for section 4 5 Center X 50 The CNC shows the options for section 5 Tangency Yes 6 Radius 40 X 50 The CNC shows the options for section 6 Tangency Yes 7 Radius 10 Center X 40 The CNC shows the options for section 7 8 X 60 The CNC s
292. terface dEScCription irns i iin ainakaa elec ia STAES 13 3 The circularity roundness test z 13 3 1 interface descripto M eiis nnn a E a EE AENEA EL DENE 13 3 2 Configuring and executing the circularity roundness test 289 13 3 3 Configure the graphic environment sesessssssssssiissssisssirssiissrsnnssrnnnsinnsrnnnsnnnn 290 13 3 4 Define and execute the movement subroutine esseserssrresrrerrerrerrerrrrrrerenn 291 13 3 5 Data capture for the graphic z 13 3 6 Adjustment of the machine parameters involved ssssssssesreerrissrrrrerierrrreenn 293 13 3 7 Validate the changes and save the configuration used seeeeeeeeseeerreeeree 295 13 3 8 Machine parameters that may be modified eesesssssesiisessreesrieerrrnsrrrssersssnns 296 DDSSETUP 14 1 Appearance of the DDSSetup mode e cee ceeeceeeeeee eee ceeeeeeeaeeeseeeeeeaeeeeeseeeeneeees 298 14 1 1 Seren GOSCIIPHOM cisien e aaa adaa iiaa 14 1 2 Vertical softkey menu icons 142 EISOES aeisi arsaa aap dadsssnaziateasa custehagedeas stasis dadeabaaecatudaseeaausdansteasgasies 14S Command bal siiissiscaiciasiiisnenenniinenin cies daisies 14 4 Changing the drives accessing level 14 5 Parameters and variables service T 14 6 Error management Serv Ce cccecceceseceeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeaeeseeaaeeeseaaeeeeeaeeeteeaes 307 CHAPTER 15 aI Ti Onearatinn manal O O O Operating manual 14 7 Monitoring service 14 8 lInform
293. th the highest priority and it will show the sign indicating that there are more messages activated by the PLC To display the list of active messages press the key combination CTRL M On the message list and next to each message a symbol will appear to indicate whether the message has an additional information file associated with it or not To display a message select it with the cursor and press ENTER If the message has an additional information file it will be displayed on the screen FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 15 2 2 Operating modes 2 2 1 How to access to the operating modes The CNC operating modes may be accessed from the keyboard or from the task window that is displayed with the key combination CTRL A Each operating mode may consist of several screens or pages Switching between the different screens is done by pressing the access key for that operating mode 2 Every time it is pressed it displays the next screen The screen selection is rotary in such a way that when pressing this key on the last screen it shows the first one oO no Zz oO O o z Accessing the operating modes from the keyboard WS a4 E The following operating modes may be accessed from the keyboard a W 5 Automatic mode fe H Jog mode O I MDI mode Editing simulation mode User tables Tool and magazine table Utilities mode JLo le elelee Also the keyboard has a special key that may be co
294. that must be corrected They interrupt the execution of the program Although the window displaying them may be closed by pressing ESC it does not mean that the error status has been taken care of To do that press RESET After pressing RESET the CNC assumes the initial conditions set by the machine manufacturer with the machine parameters While the error window is active no other action will be possible but removing it it is not possible to change operating modes Refer to the error solving manual for a detailed description of the cause of the error and its possible solutions FATAL ERROR They are errors that force the operator to turn the CNC off If the error persists contact the Service Department at Fagor Automation FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 21 O O O Operating manual 2 5 File selection window The file selection window is common to all operating modes This window is displayed when from an operating mode the operator selects the option to open save or import a file open or load a table etc From this window it is possible to either select an existing file or create a new one A new file may be created only when it is a valid action Depending on the operating mode it is accessed from the list will only show the proper files 2 E SELECT PROGRAM TO EXECUTE CYCLE G83 NC O SA z BS CC 207 bytes 19 10 2000 11 12 42 oO xe H amece G81 149 bytes 10 10
295. the interpretation of the data Once the done capturing data the user may e Modify the time base to display different zooms of the traces 1 1 e Move along the traces to display points times time differences etc Oo g To close the window press ESC a oO n D Description of the logic analizer S The logic analyzer looks like this D s LOGIC ANALYZER EXAMPLE TRC M1000 TCHANGEOK M1004 a SPDLTOMZ B M1003 MZTOSPDL CYCLES tigger Trigger Type berar y Base Time foo Mms C Trace State EMPTY A The data area is used to define the variables or expressions to be analyzed Up to 8 PLC variables or expressions may be defined B The graphic area shows the traces for the defined PLC variables or expressions and a trace of the PLC cycles with the indicated conditions Also a vertical red line is displayed to indicate the trigger point if any and a green line to indicate the cursor position C The information area is used to define the data that conditions the display of the traces trigger type of trigger time base and trace status D The data entry area is used to modify the PLC resources Softkey menus When selecting the logic analyzer the horizontal softkey menu offers all the options FAGOR 2 associated with this service The set of options offered by this menu may be changed using the softkey which offers a new set of options 8070 CNC SOFT V03 0x
296. the edited profile will be identified with the line PROFILE or it will appear framed between the lines PROFILE BEGIN and PROFILE END O O O Operating manual 6 9 2 Data editing All data need not be defined but it is recommended to define all the known data To define the profile data proceed as follows 1 Press the softkey corresponding to the data to be defined 2 Key in the desired value which may be a numeric constant or an expression Use the SPACE key to change the value of a non numerical data tangency direction etc 3 Press ENTER to accept the defined value or ESC to reject it and return to the previous one If the entered value is accepted the CNC will select the next data Once all the data has been defined press the Validate softkey and the CNC will show the profile that has been defined Displaying incomplete sections Profile editor e gt E If there isn t enough data to show the defined section the CNC will draw as much of it as it knows The sections that are not fully defined will be shown with a dash line If there are more than one possibility it will show the available options one by one except the ones that could generate tangency errors later on select the desired option The sections with several possibilities will be shown in green whereas the rest of the sections will be shown in white EDITING SIMULATION MODE X1 Y1 X2 Y2 Angle 60 Tangent Yes
297. the graph is made once a single whole circle or continuous where the graph is redrawn for every interpolation of the machine after every whole circle When capturing points in the circularity test they are not drawn on the graphics of the CNC The machine parameters may be modified while capturing points See Adjustment of the machine parameters involved on page 293 Simple data capture Data capture is initiated with the SIMPLE softkey It deletes the graph and starts drawing the circularity error enlarged to the defined scale The capture ends after a whole circle or when the STOP softkey is pressed Continuous point capture Data capture is initiated with the CONTINUOUS softkey It deletes the graph and starts drawing the circularity error enlarged to the defined scale The capture ends when the STOP softkey is pressed When modifying the machine parameters it is possible to see the new graph over the previous one or press the CLEAR key to only see the new one Stop the point capture Press the STOP softkey to stop the data capture It stops the simple or continuous data capture at any time This softkey only stops the data capture It does not stop the movement of the axes To stop the movement of the axes press the STOP key of the operator panel Once the data capture is completed two lines are drawn on the graph indicating the angular position of the maximum and minimum error Delete the
298. the list of files on page 23 A file may be selected from the list 1 Select the folder that contains the program 2 Select the file from the list or write its name in the bottom window 3 Press ENTER to accept the selection Pressing ESC cancels the operation at any time and closes the window How to search an element from the list An element folder or file may be selected from the list by moving the cursor to the desired element or using an alphanumeric keyboard Pressing a key will select the first element from the list starting with that letter or number Pressing itagain will select the second one and so on The files can also be selected using the Find file softkey See File search on page 24 Creating a new file To create a new file 1 Select the destination folder for the file 2 Write the file name at the bottom window 3 Press ENTER to confirm the action Pressing ESC cancels the operation at any time and closes the window Sorting the list of files The file list may be ordered alphabetically by size or by date e When using a mouse select the column header with the pointer Every time the same header is selected it toggles the sorting criteria from ascending to descending and vice versa e From the softkey menu Every time the same softkey is selected the CNC toggles the sorting criteria from ascending to descending and vice versa 2 File selection window HOW TO OPERATE THE CNC
299. the machine manufacturer and they allow controlling the various devices of the machine coolant chip remover etc GENERAL CONCEPTS Description of the keys FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 1 4 Directory structure The necessary files for the CNC are located in the directory C CNC8070 and its relevant subdirectories FAGOR Version directory This directory contains the software corresponding to the CNC version installed 1 2 Do not change the contents of this directory Only authorized personnel from Fagor Automation may modify the contents of this directory 2 Fagor Automation shall not be held responsible of the performance of this iT 5 CNC if the contents of this directory have been changed 2 T Software updates are carried out in this directory and they do not affect the contents 2 5 of directories MTB and USERS MTB OEM directory W 0 This is especially directed at machine manufacturers This directory contains the modifications made by the machine manufacturer at the CNC like for example the PLC program machine parameters custom settings new screens integrating external applications etc TMP Temporary files This directory is used by the CNC to save the temporary files generated while operating The directory contents are erased every time the CNC is turned on USERS User directory It is especially directed at users The purpose of this directory is to provide the user with a memor
300. the program and goes into jog mode Operations in automatic mode The following operations are possible in this work mode Select and execute a part program The execution may be carried out in automatic mode or in single block mode Set the execution conditions first and last blocks before executing the program Searching a block Recover the history of a program up to a particular block and then resume program execution from that block Display various data related to axes position Command position referred to part zero or to home following error etc Display a graphic representation of the program being executed Perform a tool inspection while executing the program FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 33 AUTOMATIC MODE Displaying the automatic mode FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 34 3 1 Displaying the automatic mode When this operating mode is active it will be indicated at the top right side of the general status bar This mode may be displayed with several screens The current screen and the total number of available screens are shown at the upper right hand side of the general status bar Switching between the different screens is done by pressing the automatic mode accessing key The screen selection is rotary in such a way that when pressing this key on the last screen it shows the first one of the operating mode Standard configuration The standard configuration of this work
301. the tables sisirin aniani 9 1 4 Printing the tabl S snini aas a Stee ee S EL S RERE 9 2 TOO TADS iisa araa 9 2 1 Description of the icons of the vertical softkey menu 9 2 2 MING TOONS E E AN ax 9 2 3 Description of the tool data cece cece cess ceeeceeeeeeeaeeeeaeaeeeeaeeseeaaeeeeeeaeeeeeaeeneeaaes 9 3 Operations with the tool table ccccccececeeeceee eee eeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeseeaeeeseaeeeteeaeeeeee 9 3 1 Editing the tool table 9 4 Active tools table 9 4 1 Changing the tool of the spindle 006 ee 9 5 Table for the status of the tool Change process ceceeeceeeteeeeeeeeeteeeeeetteeeetaeeees 9 6 Magazine table 3 0 f2 c 2 ceccgcchexstnceccanideceivaeceescacesanicacsadenasncaeuexseveesuaerecs caeuebaieesseeans 9 6 1 Description of the icons of the vertical softkey menu 9 6 2 Listiof magazine positions ssirssceusiro rasain iia asia pinata 9 6 3 Magazine information sassis dase tiene daaa eieiei Gneicateares 9 7 Operations with the magazine table 008 9 7 1 Loading unloading tools to from the magazine 5 9 7 2 Load unload a tool to from the tool changer arm s ssssessessreeerrerrrrrrrene UTILITIES MODE 10 1 Appearance of the utilities mode 2 0 ccc eee ee ee cee ee ee tees eee ae ee tee ease sees eeteeeeeenee 204 10 1 1 Sereen GOSCHIPUON ssri esaia adaa EdE 205 10 1 2 Window GeScriptioiis ssns erno D AAA DE EAAS 206 10 1 3 Vertical softkey men
302. the text found By pressing ENTER again the CNC will look for the next match and so on To end the search press ESC The cursor will position on the block containing the text searched 6 7 4 Go to line To position the cursor on a particular line of the program When selecting this option the CNC requests the line number to go to Key in the desired number and press ENTER the cursor will then go to that line FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 131 6 8 Statistics window It shows an estimate of the total execution time of the program and of the machining time for each tool Description of the statistics window 6 This statistics window shows the following information E Positioning Machining Statistics window EDITING SIMULATION MODE A General information It shows a time estimate of program execution at 100 of the programmed feedrate the number of M functions executed and the number of tool changes made B Machining time for each tool It shows a list of the tools used in the program indicating the machining time for each tool and the total positioning time C G functions active during simulation FAGOR CNC 8070 SOFT V03 0x 132 O O O Operating manual 6 8 1 Time estimates The statistics window shows an estimate of the execution of the program selected in the editing window and whose name appears at the bottom center of the screen G1 G17 READ C A FAGORC
303. tility OPT Improved profile editor OPT Assistance in the program editor Contextual programming assistance e When programming it shows the list of instructions e When programming it shows the list of instructions e When programming V it shows the list of variables OPT Specific password for the machine parameters for kinematics Save the CAN configuration for testing it when starting up the system The diagnosis mode shows detailed information on the Sercos connection Type and version of the drive and motor connected to it It is possible to print all the information on the configuration from any section of the diagnosis mode It is possible to simulate a cycle separately from the cycle editor Setup assistance e Oscilloscope e Bode diagram e Circularity roundness test Software V2 03 Feature New values of machine parameter SERPOWSE for the Sercos II board April 2005 Independent axis programming commands Electronic cams programming commands New signals that may be consulted and changed for the independent interpolator electronic cam and independent axis The simulated axes are ignored regarding the validation code When unifying parameters GOOFEED and MAXVOLT are not sent out to the drive Electronic cam programming instructions CAM ON CAM OFF Independent axis programming instructions MOVE ABS MOVE ADD MOVE INF
304. tion of the profile After selecting the section after which the elementis to be inserted select the type of section straight or arc to be inserted define its parameters and press the Validate softkey EDITING SIMULATION MODE The CNC recalculates the new profile according to the data used to define that section and the next one tangency angle etc O Delete element To delete an element of the selected profile Once the element to be deleted has been selected confirm the command by pressing ENTER The CNC recalculates the new profile O Corners To include rounding chamfers tangential entries or exits in the defined profile See Corner definition on page 144 O Additional ISO For adding an ISO coded line to a previously closed profile Once the ISO coded line to be added has been entered confirm the command by pressing the ENTER key FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 143 Profile editor EDITING SIMULATION MODE FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 144 Corner definition To include rounding chamfers tangential entries or exits in the defined profile When selecting this option the softkey menu shows the type of corners that can be inserted O Rounding To insert a rounding at the profiles corners where it is possible O Chamfer To insert a chamfer at the profiles corners where it is possible O Tangential entry To add a tangential tool entry at the beginning of the profile O Tangential e
305. tion screen on page 275 Variables to be displayed It is the area where the user select the variables to be shown in the graphics window Up to 4 variables may be displayed at the same time This window does not allow selecting the color of each variable being displayed a To change the color of any variable it must be done at the configuration screen Trigger data In this area the user may select the trigger conditions The options offered by this trigger data area are Trigger It indicates when the data capture begins If not selected the data capture begins as soon as the user gives the command to begin The Flank Level and Position data are ignored If selected the trigger condition must be specified with the Flank Level and Position data Channel It indicates which variable or channel CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 is to be used as reference or trigger condition Flank It may be up flank leading edge or down flank trailing edge It is taken into account when trigger has been selected Trigger level It sets the value to be assumed by the variable to start capturing data It is taken into account when trigger has been selected Position It is taken into account when Trigger has been selected It is defined as a percentage between 0 and 100 It indicates the number of samples to be taken before the Trigger For example a 10 position indicates that 10 of the total number of programmed sam
306. tion selected by the manufacturer Data 3 Data 4 These data show in binary format the information selected by the manufacturer Comment Comment associated with the tool 9 3 Operations with the tool table 9 3 1 Editing the tool table Initialize table The table can only be initialized when the CNC is READY The table is initialized from the vertical softkey menu When resetting the table all the tools are deleted from the list including those in the spindle and on the tool changer arm It also initializes the active tools table and the magazine tables because the available tools have been erased Adding removing a tool to from the list A tool may be added or deleted only when itis selected on the tool list Both operations are carried out from the vertical softkey menu Operations with the tool table O TOOL AND MAGAZINE TABLE Add a tool to the list It adds a new tool to the list The tool is added to the list at the first free position Remove a tool from the list 4 It removes a tool from the list A tool cannot be removed if it is in the magazine in the spindle or on the tool changer arm Data editing Proceed as follows to fill out the tool table data 1 Select the tool to be set from the list and press ENTER to access its data 2 Configure the table to show only the data that may be defined hiding the rest 3 Define the tool data Every time a new value is defined press ENTER to valid
307. tkey EDIT This softkey serves to edit the limit values e Softkey AUTOMATIC This softkey adjusts the limits to the maximum and minimum values obtained from analyzing the axis O Softkey OPTIONS This softkey serves to configure the data for the analysis and the way the graphics will look This option gives access to the following configuration windows 1 Parameters window This window may be used to configure the data used to analyze the axes Propiedades de OscGraph Control x g Apariencia Colores Nombre Eje fx T establecimiento fi N de mediciones fo Frecuencia inicial fo Amplitud 0 1 pm fi oo Frecuencia final 20 FAGOR Aviso Jerk fo Paso entre Frec fo 5 CNC 8070 Cancelar Aplicar SoFT V03 0x These data are Axis name Name of the axis to be analyzed Number of measurements Number of measurements for each frequency it shows the average between the maximum and the minimum response amplitudes of each repetition 282 O O O Operating manual Amplitude Amplitude of the sinusoidal signal that is generated Jerk warning Factor over the jerk parameter to issue the jerk exceeded warning Settle T Waiting time from when it starts generating the signal for each frequency until the data is being taken into account Initial frequency Frequency from which the analysis begins Final Frequency Last frequency being analyzed Pitch between Freq The frequency being anal
308. to calibrate a tool Some ways are only available when using a table top probe Only manual calibration is possible when not using a table top probe All types of calibration are available when using a table top probe The different calibration methods may be selected from the vertical softkey menu The active kinematics are taken into account and do not prevent tool calibration in this mode Manual or semi automatic calibration will not be possible if a coordinate CS or ACS transformation is active or when either the RTCP or TLC function is active Manual calibration Itis done without the table top probe A reference part is required to calibrate the tool All the movements are carried out manually Semi automatic calibration Available when using a table top probe It cannot be used to calibrate lathe tools The FAGOR positioning movements are carried out manually and the CNC executes the probing movements CNC 8070 Automatic calibration Available when using a table top probe The CNC executes all the movements using the calibration canned cycle PROBE Sort V03 0x 79 MANUAL JOG MODE TOOL CALIBRATION FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 80 Probe selection Two probes may be configured at the CNC The probe active at the time is used for calibration The active probe may be changed via part program or MDI using the instruction SELECT PROBE SELECT PROBE 1 Selects the first probe
309. touching the probe After touching the probe it concludes the calibration on that axis and updates the values Selecting a tool The tool and the active tool offset may be changed from the calibration mode After defining the new tool or tool offset in the cycle data press CYCLE START and the CNC will execute the tool change Bear in mind that in this calibration mode the CYCLE START key has two functions If a new tool has been selected it executes the tool change If the selected tool is the active one pressing CYCLE START initiates the calibration Tool calibration FAGOR In this mode only milling tools can be calibrated For these tools the length and radius may be calibrated After calibrating one of the two dimensions its wear value is reset CNC 8070 to zero Use the horizontal softkey menu to select the axis and the moving direction for the calibration Once selected and after placing the tool in the spindle press CYCLE START to start the calibration The tool will move in the indicated direction until touching the probe and it will then conclude the calibration updating the tool data with the measured values SoFT V03 0x Once a movement has been selected the window will show a help drawing indicating the type of calibration to be done length or radius 84 Definition of data To define the data place the focus on the relevant data key in the desired value and press ENTER PRBMOVE Maximum probing
310. ts the wear of that offset is reset to zero There are two options for the milling tools and may be selected with the following icons e Tool length calibration This option may be used to update the length value and resets the wear value to zero It also updates the tool table data e Tool offset calibration This option may be used to update the value of the offsets on each axis The offset wears are Set to zero Validating the calibration They are validated from the vertical softkey menu 1 It validates the calibration of a milling tool LA It validates the calibration of a lathe tool It shows an icon for each offset When a lathe has a third axis the calibration on this axis is done using the horizontal softkey menu Definition of data To define the data place the focus on the relevant data key in the desired value and press ENTER For a lathe tool The nomenclature of the axes depends on the geometrical configuration of the plane or trinedron axes Fora plane configuration the names of the axes assume the DIN standard for lathes the X axis as the abscissa axis and the Y axis as the ordinate axis Dimensions of the reference part being used in the calibration These coordinates are referred to the main axes of the tool Tool to be calibrated Tool offset to be calibrated Tool offsets on each axis Offset wear on each axis When alathe has a third axis perpendicular to the work pl
311. ts and ends when the operator selects the option to execute and stop the trace Before The data capture starts when the trigger condition is met and ends when the operator selects the option to stop the trace Once the trace has been executed the trigger signal will be shown at the beginning of the trace After The data capture starts when the operator selects the option to execute the trace and ends when the trigger condition is met Once the trace has been executed the trigger signal will appear at the end of the trace In the middle The data capture starts and ends when the operator selects the FAGOR option to execute and stop the trace Once the trace has been executed the trigger signal will be shown at the center of the trace 8070 CNC Time base The operator may use this parameter to assign the timeframe to each vertical division The size of these divisions therefore the resolution of these signals will be determined by this time base Consequently the smaller the time base the greater the signal resolution Sort V03 0x 235 O O O Operation manual h PLC Logic analyzer service FAGOR 8070 CNC Sort V03 0x 236 The value is given in milliseconds or microseconds according to the active units and the selected value will be displayed in the information area There is a mark that changes states every 2ms With a time base of 10ms 20ms and 4ms it will look like this While th
312. u icons 208 10 2 Utilities SOMKGYS risian taae aaa aba eaaa Aaaa aaan able 210 10 2 1 Sorted by 210 10 2 2 ODPUONS esirge eee sea ies dee ie eee Seances 210 10 2 3 Search i FICS sicccccccssssses ccacsensess casceveesss sissaceasazcnsceccsccavacasaezavscesvcaadstesscevavissszessass 211 10 2 4 Select all 212 10 2 5 Invert selection wend 10 2 6 INGW TOLD OMe EE TET E 212 10 2 7 Protection PaSSwOlds vecsecccscceecescee cee sieeeeeeyeesd eas aa eaa 213 10 2 8 Data safety backup Backup R StOre ccceccceecesceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeaeeeeneeeeee 215 PLC 11 1 Appearance of the PLC mode oo ee ee nee cece eee eseeeseeetaeeseeseeeenaeeeeeee 218 11 1 1 SCPOOM COSCIIPUON PPETI T r 219 11 1 2 Icon description vertical softkeys 220 11 2 Programs service a e 221 11 2 1 PLG project SOftk yS siisii volte i iaa Eea Ea a AEA NE ar S RAEE 222 11 2 2 Files of the PLC project PLC Softkey ccccccececeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeee 223 113A Programm EQUINOS A AEE EEA a S 224 FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x CHAPTER 12 CHAPTER 13 CHAPTER 14 11 4 11 4 1 11 4 2 11 4 3 11 4 4 Operations With DIOCKS c cccceeeeeeee eee eeeeeeeeeeee eee eee seas aeeeeaeeeeeaaeeeseaaeeeseaeeeeeaes 226 11 4 5 Find Replace i 11 4 6 CUSOM ZIN Gir psarna rians Esana S Esar AaS ES EA E ESSEE ewer eh Gren t5 Progra
313. us output O nA U OU C M Value of the internal count of the counter The inputs and outputs that are high will be indicated with a green symbol Sort V03 0x 241 11 10 2 Definition of the table resources Each table shows the following resources and user symbols Timer table e Timers T1 T256 e User symbols defined for the timers Counter table 1 1 a e Counters C1 C256 e User symbols defined for the counters PLC Monitoring service Register table e Registers R1 R1024 e User symbols defined for the registers e PLC CNC register variables Binary resource table e Inputs I1 11024 and outputs 01 01024 e Marks M1 M8192 e Messages MSG1 MSG256 and errors ERR1 ERR256 e User symbols defined for the binary resources e CNC PLC boolean variables When defining a resource or user symbol it will be added to the corresponding table Data entry The resources and user symbols of the tables are defined at the data entry area Their values may be changed by directly assigning a value to them M110 1 R300 34 If it is a hexadecimal value it must be preceded by the sign M10 1 R200 20 The window saves the last N assignments so they can be recalled later on In order to make selecting easier it is possible to display a window with the list of the assignments already made Keys for defining the data of the logic analyzer g To select the assignments To assume the s
314. uts Compiling info It shows the result of compiling generating the PLC program The screen shows a list of warning or errors detected when compiling the PLC program After selecting a warning or error from the list it is possible to go to the erroneous Ep line by pressing the relevant icon 1 1 E PLC Outputs service Keys to move the cursor lt 4 k To select the previous or next message or error MIY To select the previous or next information page To select the first or last message or error from the list Outputs Checking info It shows the result of analyzing the file of mnemonics The screen shows a list of the error detected when analyzing the program After selecting a warning or error from the list it is possible to go to the erroneous line by pressing the relevant icon Outputs Search info It shows the result of searching text in the programs making up the PLC project After selecting an element from the list it is possible to go to its line by pressing the relevant icon FAGOR 8070 CNC Sort V03 0x 233 11 9 Logic analyzer service The Logic analyzer service is used to analyze the behavior of the logic PLC signals according to a time base and certain trigger conditions set by the user Upto 8 PLC variables or expressions may be analyzed at the same time and the result of the analysis the traces will appear on a graphic interface that facilitates
315. v To move the cursor thru the elements of the window Eer To save the new program ESC To cancel the selection and close the programs listing To save the table data proceed as follows 1 Select the destination folder 2 Define the file name atthe bottom window To replace an existing file select it from the list 3 Press ENTER to save the file or ESC to return to the tables without saving the file The files are saved with the extension MP Recall a table It may be used to restore the table data in ASCII format from a file Use the softkey menu to select the table whose data is to be recalled restored If no table is selected all the data of all the tables will be recalled After selecting the table whose data is to be restored press the LOAD icon and the CNC shows a list with the tables that are already saved To recall the table data proceed as follows 1 Select the folder containing the file 2 Select the file from the list or write its name in the bottom window 3 Press ENTER to recall the data or ESC to return to the tables without recalling the data O O O Operating manual 12 3 3 Find text It is used to find text or a value in the table To perform the search press the FIND icon and the CNC will show a dialog box requesting the text or value to be searched It is also possible to select whether the search must start at the beginning of the table or at the current cur
316. vice This service monitors the status of the operation being carried out at the drive and the status of the digital inputs and outputs of the drive Command simulator This option may be used to configure and start up the internal command generator of the drive Select the command bar It directly selects the command bar of the DDSSetup From the command bar it is possible to execute different commands of the drive check variables and modify their value is they may be written 2 O O Operating manual 14 2 List of drives This service shows a list of Sercos drives connected to the CNC For each drive it shows the name of the axis associated with it its identifier and a short description for it such as software version motor ID and the ID of the drive itself This screen is the one shown by default when accessing the DDSSetup It can also i be accessed from any other service using the relevant softkey DRIVES DESCRIPTION VERSION v06 08 AXIS BETA Apr 6 2005 MOTOR FXM12 40A E1 000 DRIVE A gt The command bar is located at the bottom of the window See 14 3 Command bar on page 302 a gt DDSSETUP List of drives FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x O O O Operating manual 14 3 Command bar DDSSETUP F Command bar FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 302 The command bar is available in various services of the DDSSetup mode From the command bar it is possible to execut
317. warranty period as well as outside of it FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x XV MATERIAL RETURNING TERMS When sending the Central Unit or the Remote Modules pack them in its original package and packaging material If the original packaging material is not available pack it as follows 1 Get a cardboard box whose three inside dimensions are at least 15cm 6 inches larger than those of the unit The cardboard being used to make the box must have a resistance of 170Kg 375 Ib 2 Attach a label indicating the owner of the unit person to contact type of unit and serial number In case of malfunction also indicate symptom and a brief description of the problem 3 Wrap the unit in a polyethylene roll or similar material to protect it When sending the Central Unit protect especially the screen 4 Pad the unit inside the cardboard box with poly utherane foam on all sides 5 Seal the cardboard box with packing tape or industrial staples FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x XVII ADDITIONAL REMARKS Mount the CNC away from coolants chemical products blows etc which could damage it Before turning the unit on verify that the ground connections have been properly made In order to avoid electrical shock at the Central Unit use the proper power mains cable Use 3 wire power cables one for ground connection In case of a malfunction or failure disconnect it and call the technical service Do not get into
318. xit To add a tangential tool exit at the end of the profile Once the type of corner to be inserted has been selected the CNC will highlight in red one of the corners of the profile Keys to select a corner g To select a corner of the profile B To select a corner of another profile Select the profile corner to be modified and the CNC will request the value radius or size of the corner to be inserted e For a rounding enter the rounding radius e For a chamfer enter the size of the chamfer e For a tangential entry enter the entry radius e For a tangential exit enter the exit radius After defining the value of the corner press ENTER to insert the corner in the profile Then one may select another corner or quit this mode by pressing ESC 6 9 8 Display area The softkey menu of this screen may be used to modify the zoom of the graphics area When accessing the display area menu the softkey menu shows the following options O Zoom zoom To enlarge or reduce the display area Use the arrow keys to move the drawings of the profiles Use the and keys of the keyboard to enlarge or reduce the drawings of the profiles O Optimum area Itselects the best display area i e it places the profile in the center of the graphics area and selects the best zoom possible to show the whole profile O Autozoom When applying Autozoom every time a new section is inserted which goes beyond t
319. y out Real actual life Machining time or number of operation the tool has carried out The CNC updates this value when the tool is being used Tool magazine This information cannot be modified if the tool is in the spindle on the changer arm or in the magazine Size Tool size The size determines the number of positions pockets the tool occupies in the magazine Magazine positions it occupies Small It only occupies its position It takes no extra position Medium It takes half of an additional position to the right and to the left Large It takes a full additional position to the right and to the left Custom The user defines the number of additional positions the tool occupies to its right and to its left rp jm mmi d q mm i am ta d A Small tool B Large tool Positions to the right Positions to the left Space reserved in the magazine for the tool to the right and to the left of its position This data can be defined when the tool size is custom Tool table TOOL AND MAGAZINE TABLE CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 187 O O O Operating manual Tool table TOOL AND MAGAZINE TABLE FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 188 Special The tool always occupies the same position in the magazine Custom Data defined by the manufacturer Data 1 Data 2 These data show in numerical format the informa
320. y space for storing part programs profiles etc as they are generated UNINST Uninstall directory This directory contains the necessary files to uninstall the software of the 8070 CNC To uninstall double click on the fimain exe file and follow the instructions displayed on the screen FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 10 1 4 1 MTB Machine Tool Builder directory DATA DRIVE MMC PLC RELEASE SUB TUNING This is especially directed at machine manufacturers This directory contains the modifications made by the machine manufacturer at the CNC like for example the PLC program machine parameters custom settings new screens integrating external applications etc This directory contains e The databases for machine parameters tables etc and the safety backup in ASCII of those tables e dat files related to the machining canned cycles cycle editor e The copies made for storing data after turning the CNC off coordinates zero offsets etc This directory contains the information regarding the DDSSETUP This directory contains the CNC custom setting made by the machine builder e The directory MMC CONFIG the files that may be modified using the screen customizing tool Fguim exe e Inthe directory MMC IMAGES the machine builder may include all the files of the application regarding bitmaps videos icons etc Initially it will be a copy of the directory FAGOR
321. yzed is incremented with this pitch step from the initial frequency until exceeding the final one thus completing the analysis Aspect window This window serves to configure the way the graphics will look Propiedades de OscGraph Control Frequencial Response The Bode diagram ul oO Z lt 2 n n lt Q gt uw no The fields that may be configured are Grid Display Hide the grid NumGridX Number of horizontal lines of the grid NumGridY Number of vertical lines of the grid Title Title of the graph Log Gain in decibels and logarithmic representation in frequency Colors window This window serves to configure the colors of the graphics Propiedades de OscGraph Control fa I SOFT V03 0x Graphics color Background color of the graph Background color Background color of the control Data color Color of the captured data Text color Text color of the graph 13 W O EE ge a2 O 2 a a 2 pE W FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 284 Axis color Grid color Vertical softkey menu When defining a new configuration the system permits saving that configuration in a file Likewise the system permits loading a previously saved configuration The vertical softkey menu offers the options to save and load configurations O Softkey SAvi ES Press the save softkey to save the current configuration After this a new screen appear
322. zation marks of each channel On the left the channels waiting for the marks and on top the channels that originate them White Green Red No synchronization mark expected Synchronization mark expected The mark is set to 1 in the channel that originates it Synchronization mark expected The mark is set to 0 in the channel that originates it gt EE Channel 1 CH1 is expecting synchronism marks from the rest of the channels The marks of channels 2 and 4 are set to 1 The mark of channel 3 is set to zero ci 0000 CH2 w w w W Channel2is not expecting any synchronism mark c3 000 CH4 w G w R In the graphic the white LED s are identified with the letter W the green ones with the letter G and the red ones with the letter R F Active work mode automatic manual etc selected screen number and total number of screens available System clock G Active CNC message For each channel it shows the last message activated by the program that is running The window shows the last message of the active channel If there are messages in other channels it will highlight the sign next to the message window To display the list of active messages press the key combination CTRL 0 The list of messages shows next to each message the channel where itis active Screen description HOW TO OPERATE THE CNC H PLC messages If the PLC activates two or more messages the CNC displays the message wi
323. zine is in an error state or not 99 To eliminate the error condition press the reset softkey in the magazine table Change status If the magazine is involved in a tool change at a given time it shows the information about the status of that change the operation is carried out when executing an MO6 manager status in execution or at rest and the status of the change process whether it is in error or not Tools in the changer arm This area shows which are the tools that occupy each claw holder of the changer It shows the number and size of each tool Magazine table TOOL AND MAGAZINE TABLE FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 197 O O O Operating manual Tool information It shows the data related to the magazine of the tool selected from the list The status led informs about the tool status Green The tool is available Yellow The tool life is about to expire Red The tool is expired worn out or has been rejected by the PLC 9 Magazine data E Description of the type of magazine To show and hide this information press the information softkey Magazine table TOOL AND MAGAZINE TABLE FAGOR CNC 8070 Sort V03 0x 198 9 7 Operations with the magazine table 9 7 1 Loading unloading tools to from the magazine The tools may be loaded and unloaded to from the magazine manually or automatically When done manually the positions list must be updated Manual load unload

Fagor CNC8070 User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents